daily update
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
729c05fc 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
8a308ae8 5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
ac145307 25@set C6X
49fa1e15 26@set H8300
0285c67d 27@set HPPA
0285c67d 28@set I960
0285c67d 29@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 30@set M68K
3c3bdf30 31@set MMIX
2469cfa2 32@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
33@set POWERPC
34@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
35@set Renesas
36@set SPU
37@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 38@set WIN32
e0001a05 39@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
40@end ifset
41@c man end
42
9160ea82
AM
43@ifnottex
44@dircategory Software development
45@direntry
252b5132 46* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
47@end direntry
48@end ifnottex
252b5132 49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
9fbcbd81 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81
NC
95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
961999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
97Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
138@end ifset
139@ifset I960
140* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
141@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
142@ifset ARM
143* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
144@end ifset
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
148@ifset M68HC11
149* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
150@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
151@ifset M68K
152* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
160@ifset SPU
161* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
163@ifset TICOFF
164* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
166@ifset WIN32
167* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
169@ifset XTENSA
170* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171@end ifset
252b5132
RH
172@end ifclear
173@ifclear SingleFormat
174* BFD:: BFD
175@end ifclear
176@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 180* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 181* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 182@end menu
84ec0e6d 183@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
184
185@node Overview
186@chapter Overview
187
188@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 190
0879a67a 191@ifset man
0285c67d 192@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 193ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
194@c man end
195
196@c man begin SEEALSO
197ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199@file{ld}.
200@c man end
201@end ifset
202
203@c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
ff5dcc92 205@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 206their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 207compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 208
ff5dcc92 209@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
210a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
0285c67d
NC
213@ifset man
214@c For the man only
ece2d90e 215This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
216@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
218@end ifset
219
252b5132 220@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
221This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
223write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226@end ifclear
227
228Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 231@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
232(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
0285c67d
NC
234@c man end
235
252b5132
RH
236@node Invocation
237@chapter Invocation
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
ff5dcc92 241The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
242and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
0285c67d
NC
245@c man end
246
252b5132
RH
247@ifset UsesEnvVars
248@menu
249* Options:: Command Line Options
250* Environment:: Environment Variables
251@end menu
252
253@node Options
254@section Command Line Options
255@end ifset
256
257@cindex command line
258@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
259
260@c man begin OPTIONS
261
252b5132
RH
262The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 265For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
266object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269@smallexample
270ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271@end smallexample
272
ff5dcc92 273This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
274result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
ff5dcc92 278Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
279point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
284occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286noted in the descriptions below.
287
288@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
289Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
293
294Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298message @samp{No input files}.
299
36f63dca 300If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
301assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
306@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
311
312For options whose names are a single letter,
313option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315option that requires them.
316
317For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 318precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 319@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 320this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 321only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
322@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324output.
325
326Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331accepted.
252b5132 332
36f63dca
NC
333Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
335prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
337
338@smallexample
2509a395 339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
340@end smallexample
341
342This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
343silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350@smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
353
354Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355linker:
356
ff5dcc92 357@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 358@include at-file.texi
dff70155 359
2509a395
SL
360@kindex -a @var{keyword}
361@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
362This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
7ee314fa
AM
368@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
375it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
376This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
377interface.
378
252b5132
RH
379@ifset I960
380@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
381@kindex -A @var{arch}
382@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
383@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
385In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
387@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 389archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
390family}, for details.
391
ff5dcc92 392Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
393other architecture families.
394@end ifset
395
396@ifclear SingleFormat
397@cindex binary input format
398@kindex -b @var{format}
399@kindex --format=@var{format}
400@cindex input format
401@cindex input format
402@item -b @var{input-format}
403@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
404@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 406@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 407that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 408configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 409to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
410default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414@xref{BFD}.
415
416You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418linking object files of different formats), by including
419@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 420particular format.
252b5132
RH
421
422The default format is taken from the environment variable
423@code{GNUTARGET}.
424@ifset UsesEnvVars
425@xref{Environment}.
426@end ifset
427You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
428@code{TARGET};
429@ifclear man
430see @ref{Format Commands}.
431@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
432@end ifclear
433
434@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@cindex compatibility, MRI
437@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 439For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 440files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
441@ifclear man
442@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443@end ifclear
444@ifset man
445the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446@end ifset
447Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 448the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
449scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
451specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453@cindex common allocation
454@kindex -d
455@kindex -dc
456@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 457@item -d
252b5132
RH
458@itemx -dc
459@itemx -dp
460These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
7ee314fa
AM
466@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
475The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
476
252b5132
RH
477@cindex entry point, from command line
478@kindex -e @var{entry}
479@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 480@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
481@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
b58f81ae
DJ
490@kindex --exclude-libs
491@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 493exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
494@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499be treated as hidden.
500
e1c37eb5
DK
501@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512regardless of this option.
513
252b5132
RH
514@cindex dynamic symbol table
515@kindex -E
516@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 517@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
518@item -E
519@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
520@itemx --no-export-dynamic
521When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
530
531If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534linking the program itself.
535
55255dae 536You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 537be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 538See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 539
8b747e1a
DK
540Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
36f63dca 544@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
545@cindex big-endian objects
546@cindex endianness
547@kindex -EB
548@item -EB
549Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551@cindex little-endian objects
552@kindex -EL
553@item -EL
554Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 555@end ifclear
252b5132 556
2509a395
SL
557@kindex -f @var{name}
558@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559@item -f @var{name}
560@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
561When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574machine specific performance.
575
576This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
2509a395
SL
579@kindex -F @var{name}
580@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 581@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 582@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
583When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594@var{name}.
595
ff5dcc92 596Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 597toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
598object files.
599@ifclear SingleFormat
600The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 601@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 602@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
603environment variable.
604@end ifclear
605The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 607
3dbf70a2 608@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
609@kindex -fini=@var{name}
610@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
611When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614the function to call.
615
252b5132
RH
616@kindex -g
617@item -g
618Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
2509a395
SL
620@kindex -G @var{value}
621@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 622@cindex object size
2509a395 623@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
624@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
628sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 631@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 632@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 633@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
634@itemx -soname=@var{name}
635When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641@kindex -i
642@cindex incremental link
643@item -i
644Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
3dbf70a2 646@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
647@kindex -init=@var{name}
648@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
649When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652function to call.
653
252b5132 654@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 655@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 656@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 657@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
658@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 662will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 663will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 664
ff5dcc92 665On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
666files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
673
674The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
ff5dcc92 681See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
682archives multiple times.
683
684You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686@ifset GENERIC
687This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 688if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
689behaviour of the AIX linker.
690@end ifset
691
692@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 693@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 694@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 695@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 696@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
697Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
699option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 702@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
703order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705option is specified.
252b5132 706
9c8ebd6a
DJ
707If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
252b5132
RH
710@ifset UsesEnvVars
711The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 712@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
713some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714@end ifset
715
716The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720@cindex emulation
721@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 722@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
723Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730configured.
731
732@cindex link map
733@kindex -M
734@kindex --print-map
735@item -M
736@itemx --print-map
737Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738information about the link, including the following:
739
740@itemize @bullet
741@item
3b83e13a 742Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
743@item
744How common symbols are allocated.
745@item
746All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
748@item
749The values assigned to symbols.
750
751Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757linker script containing:
758
759@smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763@end smallexample
764
765will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766option is used:
767
768@smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772@end smallexample
773
774See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775scripts.
252b5132
RH
776@end itemize
777
778@kindex -n
779@cindex read-only text
780@cindex NMAGIC
781@kindex --nmagic
782@item -n
783@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
784Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
787
788@kindex -N
789@kindex --omagic
790@cindex read/write from cmd line
791@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 792@item -N
252b5132
RH
793@itemx --omagic
794Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
795not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
797mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
800
801@kindex --no-omagic
802@cindex OMAGIC
803@item --no-omagic
804This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
808
809@kindex -o @var{output}
810@kindex --output=@var{output}
811@cindex naming the output file
812@item -o @var{output}
813@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 814Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
815option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818@kindex -O @var{level}
819@cindex generating optimized output
820@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 821If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 822the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
823should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 828
a712da20
NC
829@kindex -q
830@kindex --emit-relocs
831@cindex retain relocations in final executable
832@item -q
833@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 834Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
835Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837in larger executables.
838
dbab7a7b
NC
839This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
4f471f39
RS
841@kindex --force-dynamic
842@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843@item --force-dynamic
844Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845to VxWorks targets.
846
252b5132
RH
847@cindex partial link
848@cindex relocatable output
849@kindex -r
1049f94e 850@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 851@item -r
1049f94e 852@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 853Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 854turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
855linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 858@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
859If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
62bf86b4
HPN
863When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867with input files in other formats at all.
868
252b5132
RH
869This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871@kindex -R @var{file}
872@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873@cindex symbol-only input
874@item -R @var{filename}
875@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
ff5dcc92 881For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 882followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 883the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
884
885@kindex -s
886@kindex --strip-all
887@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 888@item -s
252b5132
RH
889@itemx --strip-all
890Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892@kindex -S
893@kindex --strip-debug
894@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 895@item -S
252b5132
RH
896@itemx --strip-debug
897Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899@kindex -t
900@kindex --trace
901@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 902@item -t
252b5132 903@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 904Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
905
906@kindex -T @var{script}
907@kindex --script=@var{script}
908@cindex script files
909@item -T @var{scriptfile}
910@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 912@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 913@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
914output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917options accumulate.
252b5132 918
14be8564
L
919@kindex -dT @var{script}
920@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921@cindex script files
922@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933@samp{gcc}).
934
252b5132
RH
935@kindex -u @var{symbol}
936@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937@cindex undefined symbol
938@item -u @var{symbol}
939@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946@kindex -Ur
947@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 948@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
949For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 951turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
952@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956@samp{-r} for the others.
957
577a0623
AM
958@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966in a linker script.
a854a4a7 967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -v
969@kindex -V
970@kindex --version
971@cindex version
972@item -v
973@itemx --version
974@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 975Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
976lists the supported emulations.
977
978@kindex -x
979@kindex --discard-all
980@cindex deleting local symbols
981@item -x
982@itemx --discard-all
983Delete all local symbols.
984
985@kindex -X
986@kindex --discard-locals
987@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 988@item -X
252b5132 989@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
990Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
993
994@kindex -y @var{symbol}
995@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996@cindex symbol tracing
997@item -y @var{symbol}
998@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006@kindex -Y @var{path}
1007@item -Y @var{path}
1008Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1013The recognized keywords are:
1014@table @samp
1015
1016@item combreloc
1017Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018lookup caching possible.
1019
1020@item defs
560e09e9 1021Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1022shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1023
6aa29e7b
JJ
1024@item execstack
1025Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
cd6d6c15
NC
1027@item initfirst
1028This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033objects.
1034
1035@item interpose
1036Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037but the primary executable.
1038
5fa222e4
AM
1039@item lazy
1040When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043Lazy binding is the default.
1044
cd6d6c15
NC
1045@item loadfltr
1046Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047runtime.
1048
1049@item muldefs
1050Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052@item nocombreloc
1053Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055@item nocopyreloc
1056Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058@item nodefaultlib
1059Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062@item nodelete
1063Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065@item nodlopen
1066Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068@item nodump
1069Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
6aa29e7b
JJ
1071@item noexecstack
1072Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074@item norelro
1075Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
cd6d6c15
NC
1077@item now
1078When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082first called.
1083
1084@item origin
1085Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
6aa29e7b
JJ
1087@item relro
1088Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
24718e3b
L
1090@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
cd6d6c15
NC
1096@end table
1097
ece2d90e 1098Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1099
1100@kindex -(
1101@cindex groups of archives
1102@item -( @var{archives} -)
1103@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1104The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1105either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1106
1107The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1108references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1109the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1110archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1111object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1112would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1113they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1114resolved.
1115
1116Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1117it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1118more archives.
1119
69da35b5
NC
1120@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1123@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1124Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1125recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1126and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1127the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1128behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1129so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1130restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1131
4a43e768
AM
1132@kindex --as-needed
1133@kindex --no-as-needed
1134@item --as-needed
1135@itemx --no-as-needed
1136This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1137on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1138the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1139on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1140needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1141emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1142from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1143DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1144undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1145@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1146
e56f61be
L
1147@kindex --add-needed
1148@kindex --no-add-needed
1149@item --add-needed
1150@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1151These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1152their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1153options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1154and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1155
252b5132
RH
1156@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1157@item -assert @var{keyword}
1158This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1159
1160@kindex -Bdynamic
1161@kindex -dy
1162@kindex -call_shared
1163@item -Bdynamic
1164@itemx -dy
1165@itemx -call_shared
1166Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1167for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1168default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1169for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1170multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1171@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1172
a1ab1d2a
UD
1173@kindex -Bgroup
1174@item -Bgroup
1175Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1176section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1177object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1178@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1179only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1180
252b5132
RH
1181@kindex -Bstatic
1182@kindex -dn
1183@kindex -non_shared
1184@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1185@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1186@itemx -dn
1187@itemx -non_shared
1188@itemx -static
1189Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1190platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1191variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1192may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1193library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1194option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1195option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1196shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1197references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1198libraries.
252b5132
RH
1199
1200@kindex -Bsymbolic
1201@item -Bsymbolic
1202When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1203definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1204for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1205within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1206platforms which support shared libraries.
1207
40b36307
L
1208@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1209@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1210When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1211symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1212This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1213libraries.
1214
55255dae
L
1215@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1218typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1219global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1220within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1221to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1222in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1223which support shared libraries.
1224
1225The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1226scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1227
40b36307
L
1228@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1229@item --dynamic-list-data
1230Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1231
1232@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1235is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1236
0b8a70d9
L
1237@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1240
252b5132
RH
1241@kindex --check-sections
1242@kindex --no-check-sections
1243@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1244@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1245Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1246been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1247perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1248suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1249allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1250restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1251Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1252force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1253option.
252b5132 1254
ddbb8a31
NC
1255@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1258@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1259This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1260by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1261command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1262output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1263input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1264specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1265follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1266behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1267
1268This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1269libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1270the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1271DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1272required by the output binary. With
1273@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1274of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1275library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1276symbols.
1277
252b5132
RH
1278@cindex cross reference table
1279@kindex --cref
1280@item --cref
1281Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1282generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1283Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1284
1285The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1286easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1287sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1288symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1289definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1290
4818e05f
AM
1291@cindex common allocation
1292@kindex --no-define-common
1293@item --no-define-common
1294This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1295The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1296@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1297
1298The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1299the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1300of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1301forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1302Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1303from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1304This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1305and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1306duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1307paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1308
252b5132 1309@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1310@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1311@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1312Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1313address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1314times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1315limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1316context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1317symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1318constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1319using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1320Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1321space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1322@var{expression}.
1323
1324@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1325@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1326@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1327@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1328@itemx --no-demangle
1329These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1330and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1331present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1332underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1333mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1334different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1335to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1336demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1337is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1338
1339@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1340@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1341@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1342@item -I@var{file}
1343@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1344Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1345generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1346linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1347doing.
1348
7ce691ae 1349@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1350@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1351@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1352@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1353Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1354with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1355
252b5132
RH
1356@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1357@item --force-exe-suffix
1358Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1359
1360If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1361@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1362the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1363option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1364Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1365it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1366
1367@kindex --gc-sections
1368@kindex --no-gc-sections
1369@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1370@item --gc-sections
1371@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1372Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1373targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1374performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1375@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1376
d5465ba2
AM
1377@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1378examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1379symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1380command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1381referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1382libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1383referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1384the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1385relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1386
ac69cbc6 1387This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1388@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1389specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1390a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1391
c17d87de
NC
1392@kindex --print-gc-sections
1393@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1394@cindex garbage collection
1395@item --print-gc-sections
1396@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1397List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1398printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1399collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1400default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1401be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1402line.
1403
30824704
RM
1404@kindex --print-output-format
1405@cindex output format
1406@item --print-output-format
1407Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1408other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1409in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1410
252b5132
RH
1411@cindex help
1412@cindex usage
1413@kindex --help
1414@item --help
1415Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1416
ea20a7da
CC
1417@kindex --target-help
1418@item --target-help
1419Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1420
2509a395
SL
1421@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1422@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1423Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1424@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1425
1426@cindex memory usage
1427@kindex --no-keep-memory
1428@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1429@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1430symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1431instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1432necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1433while linking a large executable.
1434
1435@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1436@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1437@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1438@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1439Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1440is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1441The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1442behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1443libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1444
aa713662
L
1445@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1446@kindex -z muldefs
1447@item --allow-multiple-definition
1448@itemx -z muldefs
1449Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1450report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1451first definition will be used.
1452
b79e8c78 1453@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1454@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1455@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1456@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1457Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1458This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1459determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1460shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1461how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1462
903249d7
NC
1463The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1464referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1465an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1466a shared library.
1467
1468The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1469libraries specified at link time are that:
1470
1471@itemize @bullet
1472@item
1473A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1474that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1475resolvable at load time.
1476@item
1477There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1478symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1479
1480The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1481select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1482architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1483appropriate memset function.
1484@end itemize
b79e8c78 1485
31941635
L
1486@kindex --no-undefined-version
1487@item --no-undefined-version
1488Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1489it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1490will be issued instead.
1491
3e3b46e5
PB
1492@kindex --default-symver
1493@item --default-symver
1494Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1495exported symbols.
1496
1497@kindex --default-imported-symver
1498@item --default-imported-symver
1499Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1500imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1501
252b5132
RH
1502@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1503@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1504Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1505files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1506been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1507This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1508errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1509have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1510inappropriate.
1511
fe7929ce
AM
1512@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1513@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1514Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1515library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1516
252b5132
RH
1517@kindex --no-whole-archive
1518@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1519Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1520archive files.
1521
1522@cindex output file after errors
1523@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1524@item --noinhibit-exec
1525Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1526Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1527errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1528when it issues any error whatsoever.
1529
0a9c1c8e
CD
1530@kindex -nostdlib
1531@item -nostdlib
1532Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1533command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1534(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1535
252b5132 1536@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1537@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1538@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1539@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1540file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1541@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1542object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1543object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1544should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1545usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1546name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1547list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1548command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1549this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1550@end ifclear
1551
36af4a4e
JJ
1552@kindex -pie
1553@kindex --pic-executable
1554@item -pie
1555@itemx --pic-executable
1556@cindex position independent executables
1557Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1558ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1559libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1560address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1561normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1562defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1563
252b5132
RH
1564@kindex -qmagic
1565@item -qmagic
1566This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1567
1568@kindex -Qy
1569@item -Qy
1570This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1571
1572@kindex --relax
1573@cindex synthesizing linker
1574@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1575@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1576@item --relax
28d5f677 1577@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1578An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1579@ifset GENERIC
1580This option is only supported on a few targets.
1581@end ifset
1582@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1583@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1584@end ifset
1585@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1586@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1587@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1588@ifset XTENSA
1589@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1590@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1591@ifset M68HC11
1592@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1593@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1594@ifset POWERPC
1595@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1596@end ifset
252b5132 1597
28d5f677
NC
1598On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1599global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1600addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1601synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1602instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1603
1604On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1605debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1606@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1607This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1608family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1609@end ifset
1610
1611@ifset GENERIC
1612On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1613but ignored.
1614@end ifset
1615
28d5f677
NC
1616On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1617@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1618
252b5132
RH
1619@cindex retaining specified symbols
1620@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1621@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1622@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1623@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1624Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1625discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1626symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1627@ifset GENERIC
1628(such as VxWorks)
1629@end ifset
1630where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1631run-time memory.
1632
1633@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1634or symbols needed for relocations.
1635
1636You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1637line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1638
1639@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1640@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1641@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1642@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1643Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1644linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1645arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1646them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1647also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1648objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1649@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1650ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1651@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1652
ff5dcc92 1653The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1654SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1655@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1656runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1657options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1658gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1659file systems.
252b5132 1660
ff5dcc92 1661For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1662followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1663the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1664@end ifset
1665
1666@ifset GENERIC
1667@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1668@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1669@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1670When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1671happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1672of the input files.
1673
1674When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1675non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1676shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1677explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1678specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1679@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1680either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1681appearing multiple times.
1682
28c309a2
NC
1683This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1684that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1685is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1686runtime linker would do.
1687
252b5132 1688The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1689libraries:
252b5132
RH
1690@enumerate
1691@item
ff5dcc92 1692Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1693@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1694Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1695between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1696specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1697used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1698at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1699by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1700the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1701@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1702On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1703@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1704environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1705@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1706On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1707directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1708@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1709For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1710variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1711@item
ec4eb78a
L
1712For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1713@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1714libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1715@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1716@item
252b5132
RH
1717The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1718@item
1719For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1720exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1721@end enumerate
1722
1723If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1724warning and continue with the link.
1725@end ifset
1726
1727@kindex -shared
1728@kindex -Bshareable
1729@item -shared
1730@itemx -Bshareable
1731@cindex shared libraries
1732Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1733and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1734shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1735undefined symbols in the link.
1736
252b5132 1737@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1738@item --sort-common
1739@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1740@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1741This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1742ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1743sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1744eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1745between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1746specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1747
2509a395
SL
1748@kindex --sort-section=name
1749@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1750This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1751patterns in the linker script.
1752
2509a395
SL
1753@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1754@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1755This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1756patterns in the linker script.
1757
252b5132 1758@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1759@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1760Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1761each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1762size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1763
1764@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1765@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1766Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1767output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1768This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1769certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1770cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1771that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1772support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1773input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1774more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1775many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1776
1777@kindex --stats
1778@item --stats
1779Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1780as execution time and memory usage.
1781
2509a395 1782@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1783@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1784Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1785configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1786that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1787
252b5132
RH
1788@kindex --traditional-format
1789@cindex traditional format
1790@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1791For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1792the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1793use the traditional format instead.
1794
1795@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1796For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1797symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1798full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1799@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1800trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1801combine duplicate entries.
1802
2509a395
SL
1803@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1804@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1805Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1806address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1807times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1808line.
1809@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1810for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1811@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1812should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1813sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1814
2509a395
SL
1815@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1816@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1817@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1818@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1819@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1820@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1821@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1822Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1823@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1824
2509a395
SL
1825@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1826@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1827@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1828When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1829of the first byte of the text segment.
1830
560e09e9
NC
1831@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1832@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1833Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1834values for @samp{method}:
1835
1836@table @samp
1837@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1838Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1839
1840@item report-all
da8bce14 1841Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1842
1843@item ignore-in-object-files
1844Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1845ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1846
1847@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1848Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1849ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1850when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1851libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1852command line.
1853@end table
1854
1855The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1856by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1857
1858Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1859unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1860can change this to a warning.
1861
1715a13c
L
1862@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1863@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1864@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1865@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1866Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1867supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1868the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1869argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1870
1871@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1872@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1873@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1874Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1875used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1876about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1877is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1878see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1879use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1880symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1881@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1882
7ce691ae 1883@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1884@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1885@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1886@item --warn-common
1887Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1888a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1889but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1890you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1891Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1892warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1893
1894There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1895
1896@table @samp
1897@item int i = 1;
1898A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1899file.
1900
1901@item extern int i;
1902An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1903There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1904variable somewhere.
1905
1906@item int i;
1907A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1908variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1909The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1910single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1911size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1912a definition of the same variable.
1913@end table
1914
1915The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1916Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1917just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1918encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1919a common symbol.
1920
1921@enumerate
1922@item
1923Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1924definition for the symbol.
1925@smallexample
1926@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1927 overridden by definition
1928@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1929@end smallexample
1930
1931@item
1932Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1933the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1934except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1935@smallexample
1936@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1937 overriding common
1938@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1939@end smallexample
1940
1941@item
1942Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1943@smallexample
1944@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1945 of `@var{symbol}'
1946@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1947@end smallexample
1948
1949@item
1950Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1951@smallexample
1952@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1953 overridden by larger common
1954@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1955@end smallexample
1956
1957@item
1958Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1959the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1960encountered in a different order.
1961@smallexample
1962@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1963 overriding smaller common
1964@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1965@end smallexample
1966@end enumerate
1967
1968@kindex --warn-constructors
1969@item --warn-constructors
1970Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1971object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1972detect the use of global constructors.
1973
1974@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1975@item --warn-multiple-gp
1976Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1977This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1978Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1979section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1980of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1981base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1982base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1983bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1984large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1985values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1986option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1987
1988@kindex --warn-once
1989@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1990@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1991@item --warn-once
1992Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1993which refers to it.
1994
1995@kindex --warn-section-align
1996@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1997@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1998@item --warn-section-align
1999Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2000alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2001The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2002is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2003the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2004
8fdd7217
NC
2005@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2006@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2007Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2008
a0c402a5
L
2009@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2010@item --warn-alternate-em
2011Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2012
560e09e9
NC
2013@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2014@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2015If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2016@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2017This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2018
2019@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2020@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2021This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2022it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2023
252b5132
RH
2024@kindex --whole-archive
2025@cindex including an entire archive
2026@item --whole-archive
2027For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2028@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2029in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2030files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2031library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2032library. This option may be used more than once.
2033
7ec229ce 2034Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2035about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2036Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2037list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2038your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2039
2509a395
SL
2040@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2041@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2042Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2043@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2044undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2045@var{symbol}.
2046
2047This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2048wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2049wishes to call the system function, it should call
2050@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2051
2052Here is a trivial example:
2053
2054@smallexample
2055void *
cc2f008e 2056__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2057@{
cc2f008e 2058 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2059 return __real_malloc (c);
2060@}
2061@end smallexample
2062
ff5dcc92 2063If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2064all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2065instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2066call the real @code{malloc} function.
2067
2068You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2069links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2070you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2071file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2072call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2073
6aa29e7b
JJ
2074@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2075@item --eh-frame-hdr
2076Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2077@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2078
e41b3a13
JJ
2079@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2080@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2081Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2082generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2083if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2084
6c1439be
L
2085@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2086@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2087@item --enable-new-dtags
2088@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2089This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2090systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2091@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2092If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2093created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2094those options are only available for ELF systems.
2095
2d643429 2096@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2097@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2098Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2099close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2100time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2101increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2102value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2103
fdc90cb4
JJ
2104@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2105@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2106Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2107@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2108new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2109the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2110hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2111
35835446
JR
2112@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2113@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2114This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2115linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2116for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2117about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2118
4f9c04f7 2119Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21201021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2121run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2122has been used.
2123
2124The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2125enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2126
c0065db7
RM
2127@kindex --build-id
2128@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2129@item --build-id
2130@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2131Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2132The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2133file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2134@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2135parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2136@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2137@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2138an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2139characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2140omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2141
2142The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2143that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2144unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2145to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2146file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2147string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2148
2149Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2150@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2151@end table
2152
0285c67d
NC
2153@c man end
2154
36f63dca 2155@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2156
0285c67d
NC
2157@c man begin OPTIONS
2158
ff5dcc92 2159The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2160the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2161normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2162use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2163@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2164like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2165symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2166object file).
2167
2168In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2169support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2170PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2171values by either a space or an equals sign.
2172
ff5dcc92 2173@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2174
2175@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2176@item --add-stdcall-alias
2177If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2178as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2179[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2180
2181@kindex --base-file
2182@item --base-file @var{file}
2183Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2184addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2185@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2186[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2187
2188@kindex --dll
2189@item --dll
2190Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2191@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2192file.
bb10df36 2193[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2194
88183869
DK
2195@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2196@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2197@item --enable-long-section-names
2198@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2199The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2200the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2201for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2202fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2203to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2204allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2205disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2206generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2207as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2208with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2209GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2210information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2211option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2212section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2213when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2214image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2215[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2216
252b5132
RH
2217@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2218@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2219@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2220@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2221If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2222do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2223only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2224resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2225undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2226@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2227to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2228warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2229import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2230to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2231feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2232@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2233mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2234[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2235
522f09cd
KT
2236@kindex --leading-underscore
2237@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2238@item --leading-underscore
2239@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2240For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2241in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2242disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2243
252b5132
RH
2244@cindex DLLs, creating
2245@kindex --export-all-symbols
2246@item --export-all-symbols
2247If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2248be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2249otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2250explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2251attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2252option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2253@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2254@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2255exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2256re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2257such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2258@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2259@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2260Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2261not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2262extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2263(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2264These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2265@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2266@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2267@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2268@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2269[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2270
2271@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2272@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2273Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2274exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2275[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2276
2927aaca
NC
2277@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2278@item --exclude-all-symbols
2279Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2280[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2281
252b5132
RH
2282@kindex --file-alignment
2283@item --file-alignment
2284Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2285file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2286512.
bb10df36 2287[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2288
2289@cindex heap size
2290@kindex --heap
2291@item --heap @var{reserve}
2292@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2293Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2294to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2295committed.
bb10df36 2296[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2297
2298@cindex image base
2299@kindex --image-base
2300@item --image-base @var{value}
2301Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2302the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2303is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2304your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2305other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2306for dlls.
bb10df36 2307[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2308
2309@kindex --kill-at
2310@item --kill-at
2311If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2312symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2313[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2314
26d2d8a2
BF
2315@kindex --large-address-aware
2316@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2317If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2318header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2319greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2320or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2321section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2322[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2323
252b5132
RH
2324@kindex --major-image-version
2325@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2326Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2327[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2328
2329@kindex --major-os-version
2330@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2331Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2332[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2333
2334@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2335@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2336Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2337[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2338
2339@kindex --minor-image-version
2340@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2341Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2342[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2343
2344@kindex --minor-os-version
2345@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2346Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2347[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2348
2349@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2350@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2351Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2352[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2353
2354@cindex DEF files, creating
2355@cindex DLLs, creating
2356@kindex --output-def
2357@item --output-def @var{file}
2358The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2359file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2360(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2361library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2362automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2363[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2364
b044cda1
CW
2365@cindex DLLs, creating
2366@kindex --out-implib
2367@item --out-implib @var{file}
2368The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2369import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2370import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2371may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2372makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2373creation step.
bb10df36 2374[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2375
2376@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2377@item --enable-auto-image-base
2378Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2379using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2380from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2381collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2382avoided.
bb10df36 2383[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2384
2385@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2386@item --disable-auto-image-base
2387Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2388user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2389default.
bb10df36 2390[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2391
2392@cindex DLLs, linking to
2393@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2394@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2395When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2396search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2397@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2398between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2399uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2400@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2401[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2402
2403@kindex --enable-auto-import
2404@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2405Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2406DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2407building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2408'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2409to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2410specification published by Microsoft.
2411
e2a83dd0
NC
2412Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2413data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2414placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2415around a problem with consts that is described here:
2416http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2417
4d8907ac
DS
2418Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2419see this message:
0d888aac 2420
ece2d90e 2421"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2422documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2423
ece2d90e
NC
2424This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2425ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2426allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2427fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2428constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2429multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2430this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2431of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2432the warning, and exit.
2433
2434There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2435data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2436
2fa9fc65
NC
2437One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2438of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2439this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2440
c0065db7
RM
2441A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2442that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2443there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2444a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2445
2446@example
2447extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2448extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2449 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2450@end example
2451
2452or
2453
2454@example
2455extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2456extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2457 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2458@end example
2459
c0065db7 2460For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2461is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2462
2463@example
2464extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2465extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2466 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2467@end example
2468
c406afaf
NC
2469or
2470
2471@example
2472extern long long extern_ll;
2473extern_ll -->
2474 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2475@end example
2476
2fa9fc65 2477A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2478'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2479@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2480requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2481building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2482merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2483between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2484constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2485
2486Original:
2487@example
2488--foo.h
2489extern int arr[];
2490--foo.c
2491#include "foo.h"
2492void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2493 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2494@}
2495@end example
2496
2497Solution 1:
2498@example
2499--foo.h
2500extern int arr[];
2501--foo.c
2502#include "foo.h"
2503void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2504 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2505 volatile int *parr = arr;
2506 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2507@}
2508@end example
2509
2510Solution 2:
2511@example
2512--foo.h
2513/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2514#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2515 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2516#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2517#else
2518#define FOO_IMPORT
2519#endif
2520extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2521--foo.c
2522#include "foo.h"
2523void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2524 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2525@}
2526@end example
2527
c0065db7 2528A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2529library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2530for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2531functions).
bb10df36 2532[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2533
2534@kindex --disable-auto-import
2535@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2536Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2537@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2538[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2539
2fa9fc65
NC
2540@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2541@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2542If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2543that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2544a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2545environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2546[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2547
2548@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2549@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2550Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2551DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2552[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2553
b044cda1
CW
2554@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2555@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2556Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2557[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2558
252b5132
RH
2559@kindex --section-alignment
2560@item --section-alignment
2561Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2562addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2563[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2564
2565@cindex stack size
2566@kindex --stack
2567@item --stack @var{reserve}
2568@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2569Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2570to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2571committed.
bb10df36 2572[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2573
2574@kindex --subsystem
2575@item --subsystem @var{which}
2576@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2577@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2578Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2579legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2580@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2581the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2582@var{which}.
bb10df36 2583[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2584
2f563b51
DK
2585The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2586of the PE file header:
2587[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2588
2589@kindex --dynamicbase
2590@item --dynamicbase
2591The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2592randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2593Vista for i386 PE targets.
2594
2595@kindex --forceinteg
2596@item --forceinteg
2597Code integrity checks are enforced.
2598
2599@kindex --nxcompat
2600@item --nxcompat
2601The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2602This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2603
2604@kindex --no-isolation
2605@item --no-isolation
2606Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2607
2608@kindex --no-seh
2609@item --no-seh
2610The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2611this image.
2612
2613@kindex --no-bind
2614@item --no-bind
2615Do not bind this image.
2616
2617@kindex --wdmdriver
2618@item --wdmdriver
2619The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2620
2621@kindex --tsaware
2622@item --tsaware
2623The image is Terminal Server aware.
2624
252b5132
RH
2625@end table
2626
0285c67d
NC
2627@c man end
2628
ac145307
BS
2629@ifset C6X
2630@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2631
2632@c man begin OPTIONS
2633
2634The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2635libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2636all executables use an index of 0.
2637
2638@table @gcctabopt
2639
2640@kindex --dsbt-size
2641@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2642This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2643or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2644entries.
2645
2646@kindex --dsbt-index
2647@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2648This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2649to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2650executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2651@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2652
fbd9ad90
PB
2653@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2654The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2655exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2656
ac145307
BS
2657@end table
2658
2659@c man end
2660@end ifset
2661
93fd0973
SC
2662@ifset M68HC11
2663@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2664
2665@c man begin OPTIONS
2666
2667The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2668memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2669
2670@table @gcctabopt
2671
2672@kindex --no-trampoline
2673@item --no-trampoline
2674This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2675is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2676instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2677
2678@kindex --bank-window
2679@item --bank-window @var{name}
2680This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2681the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2682The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2683paging and addresses within the memory window.
2684
2685@end table
2686
2687@c man end
2688@end ifset
2689
7fb9f789
NC
2690@ifset M68K
2691@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2692
2693@c man begin OPTIONS
2694
2695The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2696when linking for 68K targets.
2697
2698@table @gcctabopt
2699
2700@kindex --got
2701@item --got=@var{type}
2702This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2703@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2704@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2705Info entry for @file{ld}.
2706
2707@end table
2708
2709@c man end
2710@end ifset
2711
252b5132
RH
2712@ifset UsesEnvVars
2713@node Environment
2714@section Environment Variables
2715
0285c67d
NC
2716@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2717
560e09e9 2718You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2719@ifclear SingleFormat
2720@code{GNUTARGET},
2721@end ifclear
2722@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2723
36f63dca 2724@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2725@kindex GNUTARGET
2726@cindex default input format
2727@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2728use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2729of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2730@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2731of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2732attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2733this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2734there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2735object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2736BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2737in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2738@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2739
2740@kindex LDEMULATION
2741@cindex default emulation
2742@cindex emulation, default
2743@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2744@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2745behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2746available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2747the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2748variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2749linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2750
2751@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2752@cindex demangling, default
2753Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2754@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2755default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2756a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2757may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2758options.
2759
0285c67d
NC
2760@c man end
2761@end ifset
2762
252b5132
RH
2763@node Scripts
2764@chapter Linker Scripts
2765
2766@cindex scripts
2767@cindex linker scripts
2768@cindex command files
2769Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2770written in the linker command language.
2771
2772The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2773the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2774the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2775more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2776direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2777described below.
2778
2779The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2780yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2781linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2782to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2783such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2784
2785You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2786line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2787default linker script.
2788
2789You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2790to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2791Linker Scripts}.
2792
2793@menu
2794* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2795* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2796* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2797* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2798* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2799* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2800* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2801* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2802* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2803* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2804* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2805@end menu
2806
2807@node Basic Script Concepts
2808@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2809@cindex linker script concepts
2810We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2811describe the linker script language.
2812
2813The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2814file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2815@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2816The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2817purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2818among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2819section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2820in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2821
2822Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2823also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2824contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2825the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2826A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2827area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2828loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2829which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2830of debugging information.
2831
2832Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2833first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2834the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2835@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2836section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2837same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2838is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2839(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2840based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2841RAM address would be the VMA.
2842
2843You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2844program with the @samp{-h} option.
2845
2846Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2847@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2848has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2849information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2850will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2851static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2852referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2853
2854You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2855program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2856option.
2857
2858@node Script Format
2859@section Linker Script Format
2860@cindex linker script format
2861Linker scripts are text files.
2862
2863You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2864either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2865symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2866generally ignored.
2867
2868Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2869If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2870otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2871double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2872file name.
2873
2874You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2875@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2876to whitespace.
2877
2878@node Simple Example
2879@section Simple Linker Script Example
2880@cindex linker script example
2881@cindex example of linker script
2882Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2883
2884The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2885@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2886memory layout of the output file.
2887
2888The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2889describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2890code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2891@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2892Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2893your input files.
2894
2895For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28960x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2897linker script which will do that:
2898@smallexample
2899SECTIONS
2900@{
2901 . = 0x10000;
2902 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2903 . = 0x8000000;
2904 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2905 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2906@}
2907@end smallexample
2908
2909You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2910followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2911descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2912
252b5132
RH
2913The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2914sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2915counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2916other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2917current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2918incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2919@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2920
2921The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2922required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2923after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2924which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2925wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2926means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2927
2928Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2929@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2930@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2931
2932The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2933the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2934at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2935output section, the value of the location counter will be
2936@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2937effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2938immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2939
2940The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2941alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2942example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2943sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2944may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2945sections.
2946
2947That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2948
2949@node Simple Commands
2950@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2951@cindex linker script simple commands
2952In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2953
2954@menu
2955* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2956* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2957@ifclear SingleFormat
2958* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2959@end ifclear
2960
4a93e180 2961* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2962* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2963@end menu
2964
2965@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2966@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2967@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2968@cindex start of execution
2969@cindex first instruction
2970@cindex entry point
2971The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2972point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2973entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2974@smallexample
2975ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2976@end smallexample
2977
2978There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2979entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2980stopping when one of them succeeds:
2981@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2982@item
252b5132 2983the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2984@item
252b5132 2985the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2986@item
3ab904c4
NC
2987the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2988targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2989check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2990@item
252b5132 2991the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2992@item
252b5132
RH
2993The address @code{0}.
2994@end itemize
2995
2996@node File Commands
36f63dca 2997@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2998@cindex linker script file commands
2999Several linker script commands deal with files.
3000
3001@table @code
3002@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3003@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3004@cindex including a linker script
3005Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3006be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3007with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
300810 levels deep.
3009
4006703d
NS
3010You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3011@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3012
252b5132
RH
3013@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3014@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3015@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3016@cindex input files in linker scripts
3017@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3018@cindex linker script input object files
3019The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3020in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3021
3022For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3023a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3024then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3025
3026In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3027script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3028
e3f2db7f
AO
3029In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3030with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3031located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3032for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3033open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3034linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3035description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3036
ff5dcc92 3037If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3038name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3039@samp{-l}.
3040
3041When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3042files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3043script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3044
3045@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3046@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3047@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3048@cindex grouping input files
3049The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3050files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3051new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3052in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3053
b717d30e
JJ
3054@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3055@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3056@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3057This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3058commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3059as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3060with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3061when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3062@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3063and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3064setting afterwards.
3065
252b5132
RH
3066@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3067@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3068@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3069The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3070@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3071@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3072Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3073precedence.
3074
3075You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3076output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3077
3078@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3079@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3080@cindex library search path in linker script
3081@cindex archive search path in linker script
3082@cindex search path in linker script
3083The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3084@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3085@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3086on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3087are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3088the command line option are searched first.
3089
3090@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3091@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3092@cindex first input file
3093The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3094that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3095though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3096when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3097first file.
3098@end table
3099
3100@ifclear SingleFormat
3101@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3102@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3103A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3104
3105@table @code
3106@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3107@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3108@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3109@cindex output file format in linker script
3110The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3111output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3112exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3113(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3114line option takes precedence.
3115
3116You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3117formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3118This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3119desired endianness.
3120
3121If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3122will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3123output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3124used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3125
3126For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3127command:
3128@smallexample
3129OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3130@end smallexample
3131This says that the default format for the output file is
3132@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3133option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3134format.
3135
3136@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3137@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3138@cindex input file format in linker script
3139The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3140files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3141This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3142(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3143is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3144command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3145@end table
3146@end ifclear
3147
4a93e180
NC
3148@node REGION_ALIAS
3149@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3150@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3151@cindex region alias
3152@cindex region names
3153
3154Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3155@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3156
3157@smallexample
3158REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3159@end smallexample
3160
3161The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3162memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3163to memory regions. An example follows.
3164
3165Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3166memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3167that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3168non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3169access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3170read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3171sections:
3172
3173@itemize @bullet
3174@item
3175@code{.text} program code;
3176@item
3177@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3178@item
3179@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3180@item
3181@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3182@end itemize
3183
3184The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3185part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3186output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3187systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3188@code{C}:
3189@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3190@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3191@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3192@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3193@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3194@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3195@end multitable
3196The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3197loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3198the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3199the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3200
3201The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3202includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3203memory layout:
3204@smallexample
3205INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3206
3207SECTIONS
3208 @{
3209 .text :
3210 @{
3211 *(.text)
3212 @} > REGION_TEXT
3213 .rodata :
3214 @{
3215 *(.rodata)
3216 rodata_end = .;
3217 @} > REGION_RODATA
3218 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3219 @{
3220 data_start = .;
3221 *(.data)
3222 @} > REGION_DATA
3223 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3224 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3225 .bss :
3226 @{
3227 *(.bss)
3228 @} > REGION_BSS
3229 @}
3230@end smallexample
3231
3232Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3233regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3234variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3235@table @code
3236@item A
3237Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3238@smallexample
3239MEMORY
3240 @{
3241 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3242 @}
3243
3244REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3245REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3246REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3247REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3248@end smallexample
3249@item B
3250Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3251into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3252@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3253@smallexample
3254MEMORY
3255 @{
3256 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3257 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3258 @}
3259
3260REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3261REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3262REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3263REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3264@end smallexample
3265@item C
3266Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3267@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3268initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3269system start into the @code{RAM}.
3270@smallexample
3271MEMORY
3272 @{
3273 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3274 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3275 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3276 @}
3277
3278REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3279REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3280REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3281REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3282@end smallexample
3283@end table
3284
3285It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3286@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3287necessary:
3288@smallexample
3289#include <string.h>
3290
3291extern char data_start [];
3292extern char data_size [];
3293extern char data_load_start [];
3294
3295void copy_data(void)
3296@{
3297 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3298 @{
3299 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3300 @}
3301@}
3302@end smallexample
3303
252b5132 3304@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3305@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3306There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3307
3308@table @code
3309@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3310@kindex ASSERT
3311@cindex assertion in linker script
3312Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3313with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3314
3315@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3316@kindex EXTERN
3317@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3318Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3319symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3320modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3321each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3322command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3323
3324@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3325@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3326@cindex common allocation in linker script
3327This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3328to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3329output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3330
4818e05f
AM
3331@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3332@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3333@cindex common allocation in linker script
3334This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3335command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3336to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3337
53d25da6
AM
3338@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3339@kindex INSERT
3340@cindex insert user script into default script
3341This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3342augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3343inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3344@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3345default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3346sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3347linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3348insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3349linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3350default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3351of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3352to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3353is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3354
3355@smallexample
3356SECTIONS
3357@{
3358 OVERLAY :
3359 @{
3360 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3361 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3362 @}
3363@}
3364INSERT AFTER .text;
3365@end smallexample
3366
252b5132
RH
3367@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3368@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3369@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3370This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3371references among certain output sections.
3372
3373In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3374using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3375will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3376errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3377a function defined in the other section.
3378
3379The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3380@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3381an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3382@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3383names.
3384
3385@ifclear SingleFormat
3386@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3387@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3388@cindex machine architecture
3389@cindex architecture
3390Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3391of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3392architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3393the @samp{-f} option.
3394@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3395
3396@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3397@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3398This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3399@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3400in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3401@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3402@end table
3403
3404@node Assignments
3405@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3406@cindex assignment in scripts
3407@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3408@cindex variables, defining
3409You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3410the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3411
3412@menu
3413* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3414* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3415* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3416* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3417@end menu
3418
3419@node Simple Assignments
3420@subsection Simple Assignments
3421
3422You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3423
3424@table @code
3425@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3426@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3427@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3428@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3429@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3430@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3431@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3432@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3433@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3434@end table
3435
3436The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3437@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3438defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3439
3440The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3441may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3442
3443The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3444
3445Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3446
3447You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3448statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3449section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3450
3451The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3452expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3453
3454Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3455assignments may be used:
3456
3457@smallexample
3458floating_point = 0;
3459SECTIONS
3460@{
3461 .text :
3462 @{
3463 *(.text)
3464 _etext = .;
3465 @}
156e34dd 3466 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3467 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3468@}
3469@end smallexample
3470@noindent
3471In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3472zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3473the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3474defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3475upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3476
3477@node PROVIDE
3478@subsection PROVIDE
3479@cindex PROVIDE
3480In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3481only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3482the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3483@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3484@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3485@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3486@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3487@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3488
3489Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3490@smallexample
3491SECTIONS
3492@{
3493 .text :
3494 @{
3495 *(.text)
3496 _etext = .;
3497 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3498 @}
3499@}
3500@end smallexample
3501
3502In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3503underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3504the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3505underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3506If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3507linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3508
7af8e998
L
3509@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3510@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3511@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3512Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3513hidden and won't be exported.
3514
73ae6183
NC
3515@node Source Code Reference
3516@subsection Source Code Reference
3517
3518Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3519intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3520a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3521symbol that does not have a value.
3522
3523Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3524transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3525stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3526prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3527mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3528of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3529variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3530linker script variable might be referred to as:
3531
3532@smallexample
3533 extern int foo;
3534@end smallexample
3535
3536But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3537
3538@smallexample
3539 _foo = 1000;
3540@end smallexample
3541
3542In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3543transformation has taken place.
3544
3545When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3546things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3547in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3548second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3549table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3550contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3551value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3552
3553@smallexample
3554 int foo = 1000;
3555@end smallexample
3556
3557creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3558holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3559number 1000 is initially stored.
3560
3561When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3562first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3563memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3564So:
3565
3566@smallexample
3567 foo = 1;
3568@end smallexample
3569
3570looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3571associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3572address. Whereas:
3573
3574@smallexample
3575 int * a = & foo;
3576@end smallexample
3577
3578looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3579and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3580the variable @samp{a}.
3581
3582Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3583the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3584an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3585
3586@smallexample
3587 foo = 1000;
3588@end smallexample
3589
3590creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3591the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3592address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3593linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3594access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3595
3596Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3597you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3598use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3599section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3600linker script contains these declarations:
3601
3602@smallexample
3603@group
3604 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3605 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3606 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3607@end group
3608@end smallexample
3609
3610Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3611
3612@smallexample
3613@group
3614 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3615
73ae6183
NC
3616 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3617@end group
3618@end smallexample
3619
3620Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3621
252b5132 3622@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3623@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3624@kindex SECTIONS
3625The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3626into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3627
3628The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3629@smallexample
3630SECTIONS
3631@{
3632 @var{sections-command}
3633 @var{sections-command}
3634 @dots{}
3635@}
3636@end smallexample
3637
3638Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3639
3640@itemize @bullet
3641@item
3642an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3643@item
3644a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3645@item
3646an output section description
3647@item
3648an overlay description
3649@end itemize
3650
3651The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3652@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3653those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3654understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3655the layout of the output file.
3656
3657Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3658below.
3659
3660If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3661linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3662section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3663input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3664example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3665in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3666
3667@menu
3668* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3669* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3670* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3671* Input Section:: Input section description
3672* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3673* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3674* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3675* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3676* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3677@end menu
3678
3679@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3680@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3681The full description of an output section looks like this:
3682@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3683@group
7e7d5768 3684@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3685 [AT(@var{lma})]
3686 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3687 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3688 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3689 @{
3690 @var{output-section-command}
3691 @var{output-section-command}
3692 @dots{}
562d3460 3693 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3694@end group
3695@end smallexample
3696
3697Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3698
3699The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3700name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3701The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3702
3703Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3704
3705@itemize @bullet
3706@item
3707a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3708@item
3709an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3710@item
3711data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3712@item
3713a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3714@end itemize
3715
3716@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3717@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3718@cindex name, section
3719@cindex section name
3720The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3721meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3722support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3723must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3724example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3725output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3726names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3727quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3728characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3729commas must be quoted.
3730
3731The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3732Discarding}.
3733
3734@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3735@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3736@cindex address, section
3737@cindex section address
3738The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3739address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3740is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3741
3742If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3743section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3744to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3745alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3746contained within the output section.
3747
3748The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3749
3750@itemize @bullet
3751@item
3752If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3753is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3754in that region.
3755
3756@item
3757If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3758regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3759section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3760be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3761
3762@item
3763If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3764the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3765counter.
3766@end itemize
3767
3768@noindent
3769For example:
3770
252b5132
RH
3771@smallexample
3772.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3773@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3774
252b5132
RH
3775@noindent
3776and
ea5cae92 3777
252b5132
RH
3778@smallexample
3779.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3780@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3781
252b5132
RH
3782@noindent
3783are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3784@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3785counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3786counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3787input sections.
252b5132
RH
3788
3789The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3790For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3791so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3792do something like this:
3793@smallexample
3794.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3795@end smallexample
3796@noindent
3797This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3798aligned upward to the specified value.
3799
3800Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3801location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3802sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3803
3804@node Input Section
36f63dca 3805@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3806@cindex input sections
3807@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3808The most common output section command is an input section description.
3809
3810The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3811You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3812in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3813map the input files into your memory layout.
3814
3815@menu
3816* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3817* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3818* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3819* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3820* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3821@end menu
3822
3823@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3824@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3825@cindex input section basics
3826An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3827by a list of section names in parentheses.
3828
3829The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3830describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3831
3832The most common input section description is to include all input
3833sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3834include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3835@smallexample
3836*(.text)
3837@end smallexample
3838@noindent
18625d54
CM
3839Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3840of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3841match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3842example:
252b5132 3843@smallexample
b4346c09 3844*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3845@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3846will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3847@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3848
3849There are two ways to include more than one section:
3850@smallexample
3851*(.text .rdata)
3852*(.text) *(.rdata)
3853@end smallexample
3854@noindent
3855The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3856@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3857first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3858they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3859@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3860@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3861
3862You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3863You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3864needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3865@smallexample
3866data.o(.data)
3867@end smallexample
3868
ae17ab41
CM
3869To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3870of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3871
3872Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3873
3874@smallexample
3875@group
3876SECTIONS @{
3877 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3878 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3879@}
3880@end group
3881@end smallexample
3882
3883In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3884input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3885@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3886@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3887whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3888
967928e9
AM
3889You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3890matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3891with no whitespace around the colon.
3892
3893@table @samp
3894@item archive:file
3895matches file within archive
3896@item archive:
3897matches the whole archive
3898@item :file
3899matches file but not one in an archive
3900@end table
3901
3902Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3903wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3904single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3905@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3906within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3907also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3908other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3909from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3910command.
3911
252b5132
RH
3912If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3913the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3914commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3915@smallexample
3916data.o
3917@end smallexample
3918
967928e9
AM
3919When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3920and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3921characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3922name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3923did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3924though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3925@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3926the archive search path.
3927
3928@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3929@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3930@cindex input section wildcards
3931@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3932@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3933@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3934In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3935name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3936
3937The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3938pattern for the file name.
3939
3940The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3941
3942@table @samp
3943@item *
3944matches any number of characters
3945@item ?
3946matches any single character
3947@item [@var{chars}]
3948matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3949character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3950@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3951@item \
3952quotes the following character
3953@end table
3954
3955When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3956will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3957Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3958exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3959@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3960a @samp{/} character.
3961
3962File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3963specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3964does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3965
3966If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3967appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3968will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3969sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3970@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3971@smallexample
3972.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3973.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3974@end smallexample
3975
bcaa7b3e 3976@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3977Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3978in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3979this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3980pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3981@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3982into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3983
bcaa7b3e
L
3984@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3985@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3986difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3987ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3988
02ecc8e9
L
3989@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
3990@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3991difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
3992ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
3993encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
3994
bcaa7b3e
L
3995@cindex SORT
3996@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3997
3998When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3999can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4000
4001@enumerate
4002@item
4003@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4004It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
4005sections have the same name.
4006@item
4007@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4008It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
4009sections have the same alignment.
4010@item
c0065db7 4011@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4012treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4013@item
4014@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4015is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4016@item
4017All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4018@end enumerate
4019
4020When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4021section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4022takes precedence over the command line option.
4023
4024If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4025command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4026treated as nested sorting command.
4027
4028@enumerate
4029@item
4030@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4031@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4032@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4033@item
4034@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4035@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4036@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4037@end enumerate
4038
4039If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4040command line option will be ignored.
4041
252b5132
RH
4042If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4043@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4044precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4045
4046This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4047files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4048sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4049The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4050with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4051linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4052@smallexample
4053@group
4054SECTIONS @{
4055 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4056 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4057 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4058 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4059@}
4060@end group
4061@end smallexample
4062
4063@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4064@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4065@cindex common symbol placement
4066@cindex uninitialized data placement
4067A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4068file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4069linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4070named @samp{COMMON}.
4071
4072You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4073other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4074particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4075input files are placed in another section.
4076
4077In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4078@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4079@smallexample
4080.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4081@end smallexample
4082
4083@cindex scommon section
4084@cindex small common symbols
4085Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4086example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4087symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4088different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4089the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4090symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4091to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4092locations.
4093
4094@cindex [COMMON]
4095You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4096notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4097@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4098
4099@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4100@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4101@cindex KEEP
4102@cindex garbage collection
4103When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4104it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4105This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4106with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4107@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4108
4109@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4110@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4111The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4112to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4113start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4114@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4115follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4116@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4117@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4118All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4119files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4120
4121@smallexample
4122@group
4123SECTIONS @{
4124 outputa 0x10000 :
4125 @{
4126 all.o
4127 foo.o (.input1)
4128 @}
36f63dca
NC
4129@end group
4130@group
252b5132
RH
4131 outputb :
4132 @{
4133 foo.o (.input2)
4134 foo1.o (.input1)
4135 @}
36f63dca
NC
4136@end group
4137@group
252b5132
RH
4138 outputc :
4139 @{
4140 *(.input1)
4141 *(.input2)
4142 @}
4143@}
4144@end group
a1ab1d2a 4145@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4146
4147@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4148@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4149@cindex data
4150@cindex section data
4151@cindex output section data
4152@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4153@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4154@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4155@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4156@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4157You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4158@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4159an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4160parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4161value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4162counter.
4163
4164The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4165store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4166bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4167stored.
4168
4169For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4170of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4171@smallexample
4172BYTE(1)
4173LONG(addr)
4174@end smallexample
4175
4176When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4177same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4178target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4179@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4180@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4181
4182If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4183which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4184When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4185true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4186endianness of the first input object file.
4187
36f63dca 4188Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4189between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4190@smallexample
4191SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4192@end smallexample
4193whereas this will work:
4194@smallexample
4195SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4196@end smallexample
4197
252b5132
RH
4198@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4199@cindex holes, filling
4200@cindex unspecified memory
4201You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4202current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4203otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4204gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4205with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4206necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4207point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4208than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4209different parts of an output section.
4210
4211This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4212value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4213@smallexample
563e308f 4214FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4215@end smallexample
4216
4217The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4218section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4219part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4220entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4221precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4222expression.
252b5132
RH
4223
4224@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4225@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4226There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4227commands.
4228
4229@table @code
4230@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4231@cindex input filename symbols
4232@cindex filename symbols
4233@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4234The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4235The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4236file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4237the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4238
4239This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4240normally used for any other object file format.
4241
4242@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4243@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4244@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4245@item CONSTRUCTORS
4246When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4247unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4248destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4249arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4250automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4251For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4252linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4253@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4254ignored for other object file formats.
4255
4256The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4257constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4258Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4259the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4260first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4261of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4262compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4263formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4264@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4265the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4266destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4267@code{exit}.
4268
4269For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4270arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4271addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4272and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4273linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4274runtime code expects to see.
4275
4276@smallexample
4277 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4278 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4279 *(.ctors)
4280 LONG(0)
4281 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4282 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4283 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4284 *(.dtors)
4285 LONG(0)
4286 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4287@end smallexample
4288
4289If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4290which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4291are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4292are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4293command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4294@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4295@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4296@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4297
4298Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4299and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4300need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4301scripts.
4302
4303@end table
4304
4305@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4306@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4307@cindex discarding sections
4308@cindex sections, discarding
4309@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4310The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4311for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4312be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4313@smallexample
49c13adb 4314.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4315@end smallexample
4316@noindent
4317will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4318@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4319sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4320space in an output section will also create the output section.
4321
a0976ea4 4322The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4323on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4324symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4325the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4326section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4327
4328@cindex /DISCARD/
4329The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4330input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4331section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4332
4333@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4334@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4335@cindex output section attributes
4336We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4337like this:
0c71d759 4338
252b5132 4339@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4340@group
7e7d5768 4341@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4342 [AT(@var{lma})]
4343 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4344 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4345 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4346 @{
4347 @var{output-section-command}
4348 @var{output-section-command}
4349 @dots{}
562d3460 4350 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4351@end group
4352@end smallexample
0c71d759 4353
252b5132
RH
4354We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4355@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4356remaining section attributes.
4357
a1ab1d2a 4358@menu
252b5132
RH
4359* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4360* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4361* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4362* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4363* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4364* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4365* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4366* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4367@end menu
4368
4369@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4370@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4371Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4372parentheses. The following types are defined:
4373
4374@table @code
4375@item NOLOAD
4376The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4377loaded into memory when the program is run.
4378@item DSECT
4379@itemx COPY
4380@itemx INFO
4381@itemx OVERLAY
4382These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4383rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4384marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4385section when the program is run.
4386@end table
4387
4388@kindex NOLOAD
4389@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4390@cindex loading, preventing
4391The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4392the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4393the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4394@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4395need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4396@smallexample
4397@group
4398SECTIONS @{
4399 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4400 @dots{}
4401@}
4402@end group
4403@end smallexample
4404
4405@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4406@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4407@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4408@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4409@cindex load address
4410@cindex section load address
4411Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4412@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4413@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4414specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4415address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4416
ea5cae92
NC
4417The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4418specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4419takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4420load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4421region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4422
4423If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4424section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4425load address:
4426
4427@itemize @bullet
4428@item
4429If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4430the LMA address as well.
4431
4432@item
4433If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4434
4435@item
4436Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4437with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4438section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4439VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4440the last section in the located region.
4441
4442@item
4443If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4444that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4445
4446@item
4447If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4448section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4449@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4450
4451@cindex ROM initialized data
4452@cindex initialized data in ROM
4453This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4454example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4455called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4456@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4457even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4458uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4459defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4460counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4461
4462@smallexample
4463@group
4464SECTIONS
4465 @{
4466 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4467 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4468 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4469 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4470 .bss 0x3000 :
4471 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4472@}
4473@end group
4474@end smallexample
4475
4476The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4477this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4478the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4479how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4480script.
4481
4482@smallexample
4483@group
4484extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4485char *src = &_etext;
4486char *dst = &_data;
4487
ea5cae92
NC
4488/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4489while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4490 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4491
ea5cae92 4492/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4493for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4494 *dst = 0;
4495@end group
4496@end smallexample
4497
bbf115d3
L
4498@node Forced Output Alignment
4499@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4500@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4501@cindex forcing output section alignment
4502@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4503You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4504
7e7d5768
AM
4505@node Forced Input Alignment
4506@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4507@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4508@cindex forcing input section alignment
4509@cindex input section alignment
4510You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4511SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4512sections, whether larger or smaller.
4513
0c71d759
NC
4514@node Output Section Constraint
4515@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4516@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4517@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4518@cindex constraints on output sections
4519You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4520of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4521read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4522@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4523
252b5132 4524@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4525@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4526@kindex >@var{region}
4527@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4528@cindex memory regions and sections
4529You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4530using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4531
4532Here is a simple example:
4533@smallexample
4534@group
4535MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4536SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4537@end group
4538@end smallexample
4539
4540@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4541@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4542@kindex :@var{phdr}
4543@cindex section, assigning to program header
4544@cindex program headers and sections
4545You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4546using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4547one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4548assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4549@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4550linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4551
4552Here is a simple example:
4553@smallexample
4554@group
4555PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4556SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4557@end group
4558@end smallexample
4559
4560@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4561@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4562@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4563@cindex section fill pattern
4564@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4565You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4566@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4567(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4568within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4569alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4570necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4571of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4572an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4573fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4574other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4575pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4576expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4577
4578You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4579output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4580
4581Here is a simple example:
4582@smallexample
4583@group
563e308f 4584SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4585@end group
4586@end smallexample
4587
4588@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4589@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4590@kindex OVERLAY
4591@cindex overlays
4592An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4593are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4594the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4595copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4596required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4597can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4598than another.
4599
4600Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4601@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4602output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4603command is as follows:
4604@smallexample
4605@group
4606OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4607 @{
4608 @var{secname1}
4609 @{
4610 @var{output-section-command}
4611 @var{output-section-command}
4612 @dots{}
4613 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4614 @var{secname2}
4615 @{
4616 @var{output-section-command}
4617 @var{output-section-command}
4618 @dots{}
4619 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4620 @dots{}
4621 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4622@end group
4623@end smallexample
4624
4625Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4626section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4627section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4628those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4629except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4630sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4631
4632The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4633addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4634memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4635whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4636and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4637and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4638
4639If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4640among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4641all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4642section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4643NOCROSSREFS}.
4644
4645For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4646provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4647defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4648@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4649the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4650within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4651symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4652
4653At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4654the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4655
4656Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4657@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4658@smallexample
4659@group
4660 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4661 @{
4662 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4663 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4664 @}
4665@end group
4666@end smallexample
4667@noindent
4668This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4669address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4670@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4671following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4672@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4673@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4674
4675C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4676like the following.
4677
4678@smallexample
4679@group
4680 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4681 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4682 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4683@end group
4684@end smallexample
4685
4686Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4687everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4688example could have been written identically as follows.
4689
4690@smallexample
4691@group
4692 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4693 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4694 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4695 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4696 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4697 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4698 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4699@end group
4700@end smallexample
4701
4702@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4703@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4704@kindex MEMORY
4705@cindex memory regions
4706@cindex regions of memory
4707@cindex allocating memory
4708@cindex discontinuous memory
4709The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4710memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4711
4712The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4713memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4714may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4715can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4716set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4717regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4718around to fit into the available regions.
4719
4720A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4721command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4722you wish. The syntax is:
4723@smallexample
4724@group
a1ab1d2a 4725MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4726 @{
4727 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4728 @dots{}
4729 @}
4730@end group
4731@end smallexample
4732
4733The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4734region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4735Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4736with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4737must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4738add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4739command.
252b5132
RH
4740
4741@cindex memory region attributes
4742The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4743whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4744not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4745@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4746section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4747the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4748them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4749
4750The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4751@table @samp
4752@item R
4753Read-only section
4754@item W
4755Read/write section
4756@item X
4757Executable section
4758@item A
4759Allocatable section
4760@item I
4761Initialized section
4762@item L
4763Same as @samp{I}
4764@item !
c09e9a8c 4765Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4766@end table
4767
4768If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4769@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4770attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4771in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4772attributes.
4773
4774@kindex ORIGIN =
4775@kindex o =
4776@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4777The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4778the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4779cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4780abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4781@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4782
4783@kindex LENGTH =
4784@kindex len =
4785@kindex l =
4786The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4787region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4788be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4789@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4790
4791In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4792available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4793and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4794linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4795is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4796or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4797explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4798region.
4799
4800@smallexample
4801@group
a1ab1d2a 4802MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4803 @{
4804 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4805 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4806 @}
4807@end group
4808@end smallexample
4809
4810Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4811specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4812@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4813a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4814output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4815was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4816the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4817output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4818region, the linker will issue an error message.
4819
3ec57632 4820It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4821expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4822@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4823
4824@smallexample
4825@group
c0065db7 4826 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4827@end group
4828@end smallexample
4829
252b5132
RH
4830@node PHDRS
4831@section PHDRS Command
4832@kindex PHDRS
4833@cindex program headers
4834@cindex ELF program headers
4835@cindex program segments
4836@cindex segments, ELF
4837The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4838@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4839loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4840program with the @samp{-p} option.
4841
4842When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4843reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4844program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4845This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4846interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4847
4848The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4849in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4850precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4851the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4852not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4853
4854The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4855generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4856ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4857
4858This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4859@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4860
4861@smallexample
4862@group
4863PHDRS
4864@{
4865 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4866 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4867@}
4868@end group
4869@end smallexample
4870
4871The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4872of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4873header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4874with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4875must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4876is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4877
4878Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4879system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4880specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4881sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4882attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4883Section Phdr}.
4884
4885It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4886merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4887repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4888contain the section.
4889
4890If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4891then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4892not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4893convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4894placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4895default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4896segment at all.
4897
4898@kindex FILEHDR
4899@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4900You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4901the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4902The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4903file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4904include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4905segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4906these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4907
4908The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4909value of the keyword.
4910
4911@table @asis
4912@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4913Indicates an unused program header.
4914
4915@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4916Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4917the file.
4918
4919@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4920Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4921
4922@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4923Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4924found.
4925
4926@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4927Indicates a segment holding note information.
4928
4929@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4930A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4931ABI.
4932
4933@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4934Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4935
4936@item @var{expression}
4937An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4938be used for types not defined above.
4939@end table
4940
4941You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4942in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4943@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4944Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4945output section attribute.
4946
4947The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4948which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4949explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4950an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4951header.
4952
4953Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4954headers used on a native ELF system.
4955
4956@example
4957@group
4958PHDRS
4959@{
4960 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4961 interp PT_INTERP ;
4962 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4963 data PT_LOAD ;
4964 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4965@}
4966
4967SECTIONS
4968@{
4969 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4970 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4971 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4972 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4973 @dots{}
4974 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4975 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4976 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4977 @dots{}
4978@}
4979@end group
4980@end example
4981
4982@node VERSION
4983@section VERSION Command
4984@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4985@cindex symbol versions
4986@cindex version script
4987@cindex versions of symbols
4988The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4989only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4990symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4991a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4992shared library.
4993
4994You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4995you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4996also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4997
4998The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4999@smallexample
5000VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5001@end smallexample
5002
5003The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5004Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5005version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5006version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5007version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5008scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5009library.
5010
5011The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5012examples.
5013
5014@smallexample
5015VERS_1.1 @{
5016 global:
5017 foo1;
5018 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5019 old*;
5020 original*;
5021 new*;
252b5132
RH
5022@};
5023
5024VERS_1.2 @{
5025 foo2;
5026@} VERS_1.1;
5027
5028VERS_2.0 @{
5029 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5030 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5031 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5032 "f(int, double)";
5033 @};
252b5132
RH
5034@} VERS_1.2;
5035@end smallexample
5036
5037This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5038version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5039The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5040a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5041of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5042symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5043is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5044in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5045However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5046name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5047
5048Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5049depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5050to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5051
5052Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5053depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5054and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5055
5056When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5057specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5058unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5059unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5060somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5061wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5062wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5063set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5064ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5065
5066The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5067they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5068could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5069However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5070
0f6bf451 5071Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5072in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5073symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5074won't.
5075
5076@smallexample
7c9c73be 5077@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5078@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5079
252b5132
RH
5080When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5081symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5082requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5083shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5084loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5085linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5086application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5087way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5088all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5089search for each symbol reference.
5090
5091The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5092doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5093that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5094functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5095the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5096required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5097that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5098versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5099the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5100
5101There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5102first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5103source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5104script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5105maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5106@smallexample
5107__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5108@end smallexample
5109@noindent
5110in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5111be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5112The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5113@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5114takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5115
5116The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5117function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5118an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5119version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5120linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5121
5122To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5123source file. Here is an example:
5124
5125@smallexample
5126__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5127__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5128__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5129__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5130@end smallexample
5131
5132In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5133unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5134example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5135@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5136
5137When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5138some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5139this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5140@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5141declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5142you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5143
5144If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5145within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5146(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5147specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5148
cb840a31
L
5149You can also specify the language in the version script:
5150
5151@smallexample
5152VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5153@end smallexample
5154
c0065db7 5155The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5156The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5157demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5158patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5159@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5160
86043bbb
MM
5161Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5162described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5163or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5164the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5165whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5166cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5167might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5168should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5169expect when you upgrade.
5170
252b5132
RH
5171@node Expressions
5172@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5173@cindex expressions
5174@cindex arithmetic
5175The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5176that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5177expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5178host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5179
5180You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5181
5182The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5183expressions.
5184
5185@menu
5186* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5187* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5188* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5189* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5190* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5191* Operators:: Operators
5192* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5193* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5194* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5195@end menu
5196
5197@node Constants
5198@subsection Constants
5199@cindex integer notation
5200@cindex constants in linker scripts
5201All constants are integers.
5202
5203As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5204octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5205hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5206@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5207@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5208value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5209
5210@cindex scaled integers
5211@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5212@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5213@cindex suffixes for integers
5214@cindex integer suffixes
5215In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5216constant by
5217@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5218@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5219@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5220@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5221@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5222@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5223@tex
5224${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5225@end tex
5226@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5227respectively. For example, the following
5228all refer to the same quantity:
5229
252b5132 5230@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5231_fourk_1 = 4K;
5232_fourk_2 = 4096;
5233_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5234_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5235@end smallexample
5236
8a308ae8
NC
5237Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5238conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5239
0c71d759
NC
5240@node Symbolic Constants
5241@subsection Symbolic Constants
5242@cindex symbolic constants
5243@kindex CONSTANT
5244It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5245the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5246
5247@table @code
5248@item MAXPAGESIZE
5249@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5250The target's maximum page size.
5251
5252@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5253@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5254The target's default page size.
5255@end table
5256
5257So for example:
5258
5259@smallexample
5260 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5261@end smallexample
5262
5263will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5264supported by the target.
5265
252b5132
RH
5266@node Symbols
5267@subsection Symbol Names
5268@cindex symbol names
5269@cindex names
5270@cindex quoted symbol names
5271@kindex "
5272Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5273and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5274Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5275specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5276keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5277@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5278"SECTION" = 9;
5279"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5280@end smallexample
5281
5282Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5283to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5284whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5285
ecca9871
L
5286@node Orphan Sections
5287@subsection Orphan Sections
5288@cindex orphan
5289Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5290are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5291script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5292output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5293placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5294attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5295same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5296If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5297at the end of the file.
5298
5299For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5300well as section flag.
5301
41911f68 5302If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5303the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5304__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5305section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5306orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5307representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5308character.
5309
252b5132
RH
5310@node Location Counter
5311@subsection The Location Counter
5312@kindex .
5313@cindex dot
5314@cindex location counter
5315@cindex current output location
5316The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5317current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5318location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5319within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5320anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5321
5322@cindex holes
5323Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5324moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5325location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5326and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5327doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5328
5329@smallexample
5330SECTIONS
5331@{
5332 output :
5333 @{
5334 file1(.text)
5335 . = . + 1000;
5336 file2(.text)
5337 . += 1000;
5338 file3(.text)
563e308f 5339 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5340@}
5341@end smallexample
5342@noindent
5343In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5344located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5345followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5346@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5347@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5348specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5349
5c6bbab8
NC
5350@cindex dot inside sections
5351Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5352current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5353statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5354absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5355however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5356not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5357
5358@smallexample
5359SECTIONS
5360@{
5361 . = 0x100
5362 .text: @{
5363 *(.text)
5364 . = 0x200
5365 @}
5366 . = 0x500
5367 .data: @{
5368 *(.data)
5369 . += 0x600
5370 @}
5371@}
5372@end smallexample
5373
5374The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5375and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5376the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5377much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5378move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5379and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5380the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5381the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5382
b5666f2f
AM
5383@cindex dot outside sections
5384Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5385output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5386needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5387
5388@smallexample
5389SECTIONS
5390@{
5391 start_of_text = . ;
5392 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5393 end_of_text = . ;
5394
5395 start_of_data = . ;
5396 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5397 end_of_data = . ;
5398@}
5399@end smallexample
5400
5401If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5402not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5403between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5404should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5405blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5406the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5407sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5408statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5409special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5410place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5411as follows:
5412
5413@smallexample
5414SECTIONS
5415@{
5416 start_of_text = . ;
5417 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5418 end_of_text = . ;
5419
5420 start_of_data = . ;
5421 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5422 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5423 end_of_data = . ;
5424@}
5425@end smallexample
5426
5427This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5428@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5429placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5430assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5431a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5432section. So you could write:
5433
5434@smallexample
5435SECTIONS
5436@{
5437 start_of_text = . ;
5438 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5439 end_of_text = . ;
5440
5441 . = . ;
5442 start_of_data = . ;
5443 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5444 end_of_data = . ;
5445@}
5446@end smallexample
5447
5448Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5449@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5450
252b5132
RH
5451@need 2000
5452@node Operators
5453@subsection Operators
5454@cindex operators for arithmetic
5455@cindex arithmetic operators
5456@cindex precedence in expressions
5457The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5458the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5459@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5460@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5461@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5462@smallexample
5463precedence associativity Operators Notes
5464(highest)
54651 left ! - ~ (1)
54662 left * / %
54673 left + -
54684 left >> <<
54695 left == != > < <= >=
54706 left &
54717 left |
54728 left &&
54739 left ||
547410 right ? :
547511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5476(lowest)
5477@end smallexample
5478Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5479(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5480(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5481@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5482@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5483@tex
5484\vskip \baselineskip
5485%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5486\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5487\hrule
5488\halign
5489{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5490height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5491&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5492height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5493\noalign{\hrule}
5494height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5495&highest&&&&&\cr
5496% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5497&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5498&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5499&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5500&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5501&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5502&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5503&7&&left&&|&\cr
5504&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5505&9&&left&&||&\cr
5506&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5507&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5508&lowest&&&&&\cr
5509height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5510\hrule}
5511@end tex
5512@iftex
5513{
5514@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5515@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5516@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5517}
5518@end iftex
5519@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5520
5521@node Evaluation
5522@subsection Evaluation
5523@cindex lazy evaluation
5524@cindex expression evaluation order
5525The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5526an expression when absolutely necessary.
5527
5528The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5529address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5530regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5531as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5532
5533However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5534until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5535other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5536for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5537
5538The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5539assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5540allocation.
5541
5542Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5543@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5544
5545If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5546available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5547following
5548@smallexample
5549@group
5550SECTIONS
5551 @{
a1ab1d2a 5552 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5553 @{ *(.text) @}
5554 @}
5555@end group
5556@end smallexample
5557@noindent
5558will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5559address}.
5560
5561@node Expression Section
5562@subsection The Section of an Expression
5563@cindex expression sections
5564@cindex absolute expressions
5565@cindex relative expressions
5566@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5567@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5568@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5569Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5570relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5571using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5572value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5573symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5574operations.
5575
abf4be64
AM
5576Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5577section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5578address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5579@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5580functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5581One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5582(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5583differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5584versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5585section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5586Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5587absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5588given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5589everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5590
5591In the following simple example,
252b5132 5592
7542af2a
AM
5593@smallexample
5594@group
5595SECTIONS
5596 @{
5597 . = 0x100;
5598 __executable_start = 0x100;
5599 .data :
5600 @{
5601 . = 0x10;
5602 __data_start = 0x10;
5603 *(.data)
5604 @}
5605 @dots{}
5606 @}
5607@end group
5608@end smallexample
252b5132 5609
7542af2a
AM
5610both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5611address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5612@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5613section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5614
5c3049d2
AM
5615For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5616addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5617
5618@itemize @bullet
5619@item
5620Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5621relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5622and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5623@item
5624Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5625or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5626same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5627address before applying the operator.
5628@end itemize
5629
5630The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5631
5632@itemize @bullet
5633@item
5634An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5635@item
5636The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5637@item
9bc8bb33
AM
5638The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5639relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
5640(after above conversions) is also a number.
5641@item
5642The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5643relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5644section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5645@item
5646The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5647conversions) is an absolute address.
5648@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5649
5650You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5651to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5652create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5653section @samp{.data}:
5654@smallexample
5655SECTIONS
5656 @{
5657 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5658 @}
5659@end smallexample
5660@noindent
5661If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5662@samp{.data} section.
5663
7542af2a
AM
5664Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5665particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5666
252b5132
RH
5667@node Builtin Functions
5668@subsection Builtin Functions
5669@cindex functions in expressions
5670The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5671use in linker script expressions.
5672
5673@table @code
5674@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5675@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5676@cindex expression, absolute
5677Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5678of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5679value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5680normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5681
5682@item ADDR(@var{section})
5683@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5684@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5685Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5686script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5687the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5688@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5689@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5690the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5691@smallexample
5692@group
5693SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5694 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5695 @{
252b5132
RH
5696 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5697 @dots{}
5698 @}
5699 .output :
5700 @{
5701 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5702 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5703 @}
5704@dots{} @}
5705@end group
5706@end smallexample
5707
876f4090
NS
5708@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5709@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5710@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5711@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5712@cindex round up location counter
5713@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5714@cindex round up expression
5715@cindex align expression
5716Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5717to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5718doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5719arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5720expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5721equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5722
5723Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5724next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5725variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5726input sections:
252b5132
RH
5727@smallexample
5728@group
5729SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5730 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5731 *(.data)
5732 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5733 @}
5734@dots{} @}
5735@end group
5736@end smallexample
5737@noindent
5738The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5739a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5740a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5741of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5742
5743The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5744
362c1d1a
NS
5745@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5746@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5747@cindex section alignment
5748Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5749been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5750evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5751the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5752value in that section.
5753@smallexample
5754@group
5755SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5756 .output @{
5757 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5758 @dots{}
5759 @}
5760@dots{} @}
5761@end group
5762@end smallexample
5763
252b5132
RH
5764@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5765@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5766This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5767scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5768section.
5769
2d20f7bf
JJ
5770@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5771@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5772This is equivalent to either
5773@smallexample
5774(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5775@end smallexample
5776or
5777@smallexample
5778(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5779@end smallexample
5780@noindent
5781depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5782for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5783@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5784If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5785memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5786bytes in the on-disk file.
5787
5788This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5789any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5790@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5791be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5792working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5793
5794@noindent
5795Example:
5796@smallexample
5797 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5798@end smallexample
5799
5800@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5801@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5802This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5803evaluation purposes.
5804
5805@smallexample
5806 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5807@end smallexample
5808
a4f5ad88
JJ
5809@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5810@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5811This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5812@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5813When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5814does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5815@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5816boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5817it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5818@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5819
5820@smallexample
5821 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5822@end smallexample
5823
252b5132
RH
5824@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5825@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5826@cindex symbol defaults
5827Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5828defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5829return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5830default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5831shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5832the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5833existed, its value is preserved:
5834
5835@smallexample
5836@group
5837SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5838 .text : @{
5839 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5840 @dots{}
5841 @}
5842 @dots{}
5843@}
5844@end group
5845@end smallexample
5846
3ec57632
NC
5847@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5848@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5849Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5850
252b5132
RH
5851@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5852@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5853@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5854Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5855Section LMA}).
5856
5857@kindex MAX
5858@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5859Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5860
5861@kindex MIN
5862@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5863Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5864
5865@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5866@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5867@cindex unallocated address, next
5868Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5869This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5870use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5871output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5872
3ec57632
NC
5873@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5874@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5875Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5876
ba916c8a
MM
5877@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5878@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5879Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5880value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5881option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5882@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5883be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5884``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5885name.
5886
252b5132
RH
5887@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5888@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5889@cindex section size
5890Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5891been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5892evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5893@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5894@smallexample
5895@group
5896SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5897 .output @{
5898 .start = . ;
5899 @dots{}
5900 .end = . ;
5901 @}
5902 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5903 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5904@dots{} @}
5905@end group
5906@end smallexample
5907
5908@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5909@itemx sizeof_headers
5910@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5911@cindex header size
5912Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5913information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5914this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5915choose, to facilitate paging.
5916
5917@cindex not enough room for program headers
5918@cindex program headers, not enough room
5919When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5920@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5921number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5922addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5923additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5924room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5925the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5926script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5927you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5928command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5929@end table
5930
5931@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5932@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5933@cindex implicit linker scripts
5934If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5935an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5936linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5937linker will report an error.
5938
5939An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5940
5941Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5942assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5943commands.
5944
5945Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5946at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5947read. This can affect archive searching.
5948
5949@ifset GENERIC
5950@node Machine Dependent
5951@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5952
5953@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5954@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5955sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5956functionality are not listed.
5957
5958@menu
36f63dca
NC
5959@ifset H8300
5960* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5961@end ifset
5962@ifset I960
5963* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5964@end ifset
5965@ifset ARM
5966* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5967@end ifset
5968@ifset HPPA
5969* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5970@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5971@ifset M68K
5972* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5973@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5974@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5975* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5976@end ifset
2469cfa2 5977@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5978* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5979@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5980@ifset M68HC11
5981* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5982@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5983@ifset POWERPC
5984* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5985@end ifset
5986@ifset POWERPC64
5987* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5988@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5989@ifset SPU
5990* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5991@end ifset
74459f0e 5992@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5993* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5994@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5995@ifset WIN32
5996* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5997@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5998@ifset XTENSA
5999* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6000@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6001@end menu
6002@end ifset
6003
252b5132
RH
6004@ifset H8300
6005@ifclear GENERIC
6006@raisesections
6007@end ifclear
6008
6009@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6010@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6011
6012@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6013For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6014you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6015
6016@table @emph
6017@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6018@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6019@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6020targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6021program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6022respectively.
6023
6024@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6025@item synthesizing instructions
6026@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 6027@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6028sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6029page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6030(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6031@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6032top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
6033
6034@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6035@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6036biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6037which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6038page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6039(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6040@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6041the top page of memory).
6042
6043@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6044@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
604532 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6046changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6047(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6048@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6049the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6050@end table
6051
6052@ifclear GENERIC
6053@lowersections
6054@end ifclear
6055@end ifset
6056
36f63dca 6057@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6058@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6059@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6060@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6061@node Renesas
6062@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6063
c2dcd04e
NC
6064@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6065H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6066options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6067@end ifset
6068@end ifclear
6069
6070@ifset I960
6071@ifclear GENERIC
6072@raisesections
6073@end ifclear
6074
6075@node i960
6076@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6077
6078@cindex i960 support
6079
6080You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6081specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6082family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6083incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6084linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6085libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6086search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6087
6088For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6089well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6090paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6091the names
6092
6093@smallexample
6094@group
6095try
6096libtry.a
6097tryca
6098libtryca.a
6099@end group
6100@end smallexample
6101
6102@noindent
6103The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6104two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6105
6106You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6107the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6108use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6109specifies a library.
6110
6111@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6112@cindex relaxing on i960
6113@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6114you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6115@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6116them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6117instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6118instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6119target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6120not itself call any subroutines).
6121
48229727
JB
6122@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6123@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6124@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6125The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6126
6127The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6128
85fdf906
AH
6129@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6130@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6131The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6132
36f63dca
NC
6133@ifclear GENERIC
6134@lowersections
6135@end ifclear
6136@end ifset
6137
6138@ifset ARM
6139@ifclear GENERIC
6140@raisesections
6141@end ifclear
6142
93fd0973
SC
6143@ifset M68HC11
6144@ifclear GENERIC
6145@raisesections
6146@end ifclear
6147
6148@node M68HC11/68HC12
6149@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6150
6151@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6152
6153@subsection Linker Relaxation
6154
6155For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6156optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6157
6158@table @emph
6159@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6160@item relaxing address modes
6161@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6162targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6163program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6164respectively.
6165
6166@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6167transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6168page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6169
6170@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6171When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6172of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6173addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6174@code{bset} instructions.
6175
6176@end table
6177
6178@subsection Trampoline Generation
6179
6180@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6181@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6182For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6183call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6184will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6185trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6186case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6187point to the function trampoline.
6188
6189@ifclear GENERIC
6190@lowersections
6191@end ifclear
6192@end ifset
6193
36f63dca 6194@node ARM
3674e28a 6195@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6196
6197@cindex ARM interworking support
6198@kindex --support-old-code
6199For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6200between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6201been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6202line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6203libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6204option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6205given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6206which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6207the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6208non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6209
6210@cindex thumb entry point
6211@cindex entry point, thumb
6212@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6213The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6214@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6215But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6216branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6217executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6218
ce11ba6c
KT
6219@cindex PE import table prefixing
6220@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6221The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6222the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6223elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6224import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6225
e489d0ae
PB
6226@cindex BE8
6227@kindex --be8
6228The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6229executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6230The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6231
3674e28a
PB
6232@cindex TARGET1
6233@kindex --target1-rel
6234@kindex --target1-abs
6235The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6236@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6237or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6238and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6239
6240@cindex TARGET2
6241@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6242The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6243@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6244meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6245@table @samp
6246@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6247@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6248@item abs
6249@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6250@item got-rel
6251@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6252@end table
6253
319850b4
JB
6254@cindex FIX_V4BX
6255@kindex --fix-v4bx
6256The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6257specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6258interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6259also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6260
6261In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6262linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6263@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6264
6265In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6266relocations are ignored.
6267
845b51d6
PB
6268@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6269@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6270Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6271relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6272
6273@smallexample
6274TST rM, #1
6275MOVEQ PC, rM
6276BX Rn
6277@end smallexample
6278
6279This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6280and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6281condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6282
33bfe774
JB
6283@cindex USE_BLX
6284@kindex --use-blx
6285The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6286BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6287situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6288code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6289each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6290
6291This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6292specify it if you are using that target.
6293
c6dd86c6
JB
6294@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6295@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6296The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6297bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6298instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6299to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6300the support code can read the intended values.
6301
6302The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6303intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6304and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6305intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6306full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6307you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6308
6309If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6310enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6311@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6312mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6313vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6314@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6315
6316If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6317potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6318such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6319first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6320instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6321the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6322are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6323
bf21ed78
MS
6324@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6325@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6326The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6327warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6328enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6329linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6330using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6331not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6332
6333@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6334@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6335The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6336warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6337@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6338linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6339using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6340
726150b7
NC
6341@cindex PIC_VENEER
6342@kindex --pic-veneer
6343The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6344ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6345is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6346@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6347
6348@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6349@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6350The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6351code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6352perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6353placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6354controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6355The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6356duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6357group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6358code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6359where they should be placed.
6360
6361The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6362@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6363placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6364branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6365placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6366value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6367exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6368A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6369linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6370from the input sections.
6371
6372The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6373@samp{N = +1}.
6374
1a51c1a4
NC
6375Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6376only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6377otherwise.
6378
36f63dca
NC
6379@ifclear GENERIC
6380@lowersections
6381@end ifclear
6382@end ifset
6383
6384@ifset HPPA
6385@ifclear GENERIC
6386@raisesections
6387@end ifclear
6388
6389@node HPPA ELF32
6390@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6391@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6392@kindex --multi-subspace
6393When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6394import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6395The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6396stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6397multiple sub-spaces.
6398
6399@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6400@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6401Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6402stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6403@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6404sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6405a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6406the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6407conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6408prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6409A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6410branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6411@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6412@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6413detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6414positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6415
6416Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6417single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6418create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6419large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6420
6421@ifclear GENERIC
6422@lowersections
6423@end ifclear
6424@end ifset
6425
7fb9f789
NC
6426@ifset M68K
6427@ifclear GENERIC
6428@raisesections
6429@end ifclear
6430
6431@node M68K
6432@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6433
6434@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6435@kindex --got=@var{type}
6436The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6437The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6438@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6439the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6440@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6441entries only at non-negative offsets.
6442@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6443entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6444support such GOTs.
6445@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6446output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6447file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6448files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6449
6450@ifclear GENERIC
6451@lowersections
6452@end ifclear
6453@end ifset
6454
36f63dca
NC
6455@ifset MMIX
6456@ifclear GENERIC
6457@raisesections
6458@end ifclear
6459
6460@node MMIX
6461@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6462For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6463@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6464understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6465can translate between the two formats.
6466
6467There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6468Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6469registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6470equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6471@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6472global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6473this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6474symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6475
7a2de473
HPN
6476Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6477@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6478The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6479of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6480
6481Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6482are left out from an mmo file.
6483
6484@ifclear GENERIC
6485@lowersections
6486@end ifclear
6487@end ifset
6488
6489@ifset MSP430
6490@ifclear GENERIC
6491@raisesections
6492@end ifclear
6493
6494@node MSP430
6495@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6496For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6497will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6498just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6499
6500@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6501The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6502
6503@table @code
6504@item @samp{.vectors}
6505Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6506
6507@item @samp{.bootloader}
6508Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6509in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6510
6511@item @samp{.infomem}
6512Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6513this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6514
c0065db7 6515@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6516This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6517in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6518
6519@item @samp{.noinit}
6520Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6521
c0065db7 6522The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6523@end table
6524
6525@ifclear GENERIC
6526@lowersections
6527@end ifclear
6528@end ifset
6529
2a60a7a8
AM
6530@ifset POWERPC
6531@ifclear GENERIC
6532@raisesections
6533@end ifclear
6534
6535@node PowerPC ELF32
6536@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6537@cindex PowerPC long branches
6538@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6539Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6540displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6541@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6542@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6543the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6544section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6545section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6546@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6547both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6548considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6549
6550@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6551@table @option
6552@cindex PowerPC PLT
6553@kindex --bss-plt
6554@item --bss-plt
6555Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6556generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6557the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6558writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6559@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6560PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6561compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6562BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6563
016687f8
AM
6564@kindex --secure-plt
6565@item --secure-plt
6566@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6567@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6568when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6569layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6570style BSS PLT.
6571
2a60a7a8
AM
6572@cindex PowerPC GOT
6573@kindex --sdata-got
6574@item --sdata-got
6575The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6576sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6577@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6578section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6579@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6580@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6581@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6582@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6583PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6584pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6585GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6586really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6587
6588@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6589@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6590@item --emit-stub-syms
6591This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6592symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6593
6594@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6595@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6596@item --no-tls-optimize
6597PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6598sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6599disable the optimization.
6600@end table
6601
6602@ifclear GENERIC
6603@lowersections
6604@end ifclear
6605@end ifset
6606
6607@ifset POWERPC64
6608@ifclear GENERIC
6609@raisesections
6610@end ifclear
6611
6612@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6613@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6614
6615@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6616@table @option
6617@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6618@kindex --stub-group-size
6619@item --stub-group-size
6620Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6621by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6622@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6623sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6624a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6625the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6626conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6627prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6628A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6629branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6630@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6631@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6632detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6633positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6634
6635Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6636single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6637create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6638large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6639
6640@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6641@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6642@item --emit-stub-syms
6643This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6644symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6645
6646@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6647@kindex --dotsyms
6648@kindex --no-dotsyms
6649@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6650These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6651in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6652function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6653code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6654properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6655to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6656@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6657dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6658feature.
6659
6660@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6661@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6662@item --no-tls-optimize
6663PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6664sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6665disable the optimization.
6666
6667@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6668@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6669@item --no-opd-optimize
6670PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6671corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6672the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6673Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6674
6675@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6676@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6677@item --non-overlapping-opd
6678Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6679@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6680the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6681entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6682
6683@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6684@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6685@item --no-toc-optimize
6686PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6687entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6688reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6689marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6690marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6691relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6692unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6693reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6694discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6695reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6696code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6697optimization.
6698
6699@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6700@kindex --no-multi-toc
6701@item --no-multi-toc
6702By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6703entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6704total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6705grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6706TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6707calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6708help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
670964K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6710Use this option to turn off this feature.
6711@end table
6712
6713@ifclear GENERIC
6714@lowersections
6715@end ifclear
6716@end ifset
6717
49fa1e15
AM
6718@ifset SPU
6719@ifclear GENERIC
6720@raisesections
6721@end ifclear
6722
6723@node SPU ELF
6724@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6725
6726@cindex SPU ELF options
6727@table @option
6728
6729@cindex SPU plugins
6730@kindex --plugin
6731@item --plugin
6732This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6733
6734@cindex SPU overlays
6735@kindex --no-overlays
6736@item --no-overlays
6737Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6738regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6739@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6740turns off all this special overlay handling.
6741
6742@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6743@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6744@item --emit-stub-syms
6745This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6746symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6747
6748@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6749@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6750@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6751This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6752function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6753on calls to non-overlay regions.
6754
6755@cindex SPU local store size
6756@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6757@item --local-store=lo:hi
6758@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6759the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6760range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6761
c0065db7 6762@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6763@kindex --stack-analysis
6764@item --stack-analysis
6765SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6766unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6767under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6768@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6769@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6770determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6771for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6772for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6773for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6774find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6775and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6776under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6777dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6778is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6779and calls will be given.
6780
c0065db7 6781@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6782@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6783@item --emit-stack-syms
6784This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6785in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6786These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6787functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6788functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6789such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6790The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6791@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6792@end table
6793
6794@ifclear GENERIC
6795@lowersections
6796@end ifclear
6797@end ifset
6798
36f63dca
NC
6799@ifset TICOFF
6800@ifclear GENERIC
6801@raisesections
6802@end ifclear
6803
6804@node TI COFF
6805@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6806@cindex TI COFF versions
6807@kindex --format=@var{version}
6808The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6809TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6810also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6811format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6812header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6813
6814@ifclear GENERIC
6815@lowersections
6816@end ifclear
6817@end ifset
6818
2ca22b03
NC
6819@ifset WIN32
6820@ifclear GENERIC
6821@raisesections
6822@end ifclear
6823
6824@node WIN32
6825@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6826
c0065db7 6827This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6828See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6829command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6830
6831@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6832@cindex import libraries
6833@item import libraries
69da35b5 6834The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6835libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6836regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6837archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6838support for creating such libraries provided with the
6839@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6840
c0065db7
RM
6841@item exporting DLL symbols
6842@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6843The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6844
6845@table @emph
6846@item using auto-export functionality
6847@cindex using auto-export functionality
6848By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6849which is controlled by the following command line options:
6850
0a5d968e
NC
6851@itemize
6852@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6853@item --exclude-symbols
6854@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6855@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6856@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6857@end itemize
6858
09e2aba4
DK
6859When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6860(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6861symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6862often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6863private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6864options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6865exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6866final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6867
6868If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6869command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6870if either of the following are true:
6871
6872@itemize
6873@item A DEF file is used.
6874@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6875@end itemize
dc8465bf 6876
c0065db7
RM
6877@item using a DEF file
6878@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6879Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6880an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6881exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6882name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6883command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6884
6885@example
6886gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6887@end example
6888
0a5d968e
NC
6889Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6890@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6891
dc8465bf
NC
6892Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6893
6894@example
4b5bd4e7 6895LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6896
6897EXPORTS
6898foo
6899bar
6900_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6901another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6902var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6903doo = foo == foo2
6904eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6905@end example
dc8465bf 6906
7fcab871 6907This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6908symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6909alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6910by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6911@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6912@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6913export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6914in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6915symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6916
6b31ad16
DS
6917The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6918name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6919the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6920
b45619c0
NC
6921When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6922library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6923@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6924executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6925
6926With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6927specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6928non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6929
6930If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6931or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6932filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6933
4b5bd4e7
DS
6934The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6935
6936@example
6937EXPORTS
6938 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6939 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6940 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6941@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6942
6943Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6944@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6945@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6946@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6947Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6948@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6949string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6950
6951The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6952
6953@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6954will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6955by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6956linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6957library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6958
6959@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6960The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6961the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6962@code{*_imp__foo}).
6963
6964@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6965well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6966read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6967variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6968the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6969extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6970application will behave unexpectedly.
6971
6972@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6973it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6974symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6975API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6976the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6977
4b5bd4e7
DS
6978See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6979other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6980
6981@cindex creating a DEF file
6982While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6983with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6984
6985@item Using decorations
6986@cindex Using decorations
6987Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6988itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6989declared as:
6990
6991@example
6992__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6993__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6994@end example
6995
6996All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6997any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6998this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6999the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7000
7001Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7002decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7003instead:
7004
7005@example
7006__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7007__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7008@end example
7009
c0065db7
RM
7010This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7011when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7012variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7013code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7014of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7015omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7016@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7017information.
c0065db7 7018@end table
dc8465bf 7019
2ca22b03
NC
7020@cindex automatic data imports
7021@item automatic data imports
7022The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7023by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7024compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7025issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7026code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7027c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7028initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7029decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7030platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7031command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7032The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7033suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7034trigger the feature's use.
7035
c0065db7 7036auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7037additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7038
c0065db7 7039"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7040documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7041
c0065db7
RM
7042The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7043occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7044One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7045below.
7046
7047@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7048For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7049object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7050offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7051field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7052in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7053without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7054The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7055references.
7056
c0065db7
RM
7057The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7058be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7059themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7060runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7061compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7062support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7063run without error on an older system.
7064
c0065db7
RM
7065@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7066enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7067
7068@cindex direct linking to a dll
7069@item direct linking to a dll
7070The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7071including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7072libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7073traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7074libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7075function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7076though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7077storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7078tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7079large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7080
c0065db7 7081Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7082@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7083of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7084perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7085select the dll instead of an import library.
7086
2ca22b03 7087
69da35b5
NC
7088For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7089to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7090
7091@example
45e948fe
NC
7092libxxx.dll.a
7093xxx.dll.a
7094libxxx.a
7095xxx.lib
69da35b5 7096cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7097libxxx.dll
7098xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7099@end example
7100
69da35b5
NC
7101before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7102
c0065db7
RM
7103(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7104where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7105@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7106file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7107@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7108
c0065db7
RM
7109Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7110@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7111was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7112various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7113could coexist on the same machine.
7114
2ca22b03
NC
7115The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7116applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7117libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7118
7119@example
7120bin/
7121 cygxxx.dll
7122lib/
7123 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7124 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7125@end example
7126
c0065db7
RM
7127Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7128done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7129
71301. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7131@example
7132gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7133@end example
2ca22b03 7134
69da35b5
NC
7135However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7136(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7137@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7138not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7139
2ca22b03
NC
71402. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7141directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7142should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7143making the app/dll.
7144
7145@example
7146ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7147@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7148
7149Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7150
7151@example
7152gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7153@end example
69da35b5
NC
7154
7155This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7156perfectly legal
7157
7158@example
7159bin/
7160 cygxxx-5.dll
7161lib/
c0065db7 7162 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7163@end example
7164
dc8465bf 7165Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7166even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7167@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7168
7169Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7170wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7171
71721. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7173work with auto-imported data.
7174
dc8465bf
NC
71752. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7176import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7177symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7178for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7179possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7180
45e948fe
NC
71813. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7182critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7183in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7184stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7185
69da35b5 7186So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7187true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7188a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7189binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7190massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7191requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7192will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7193
c0065db7 7194@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7195@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7196@item adding additional names
7197Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7198A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7199exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7200when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7201import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7202
c0065db7 7203@example
dc8465bf
NC
7204LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7205
7206EXPORTS
c0065db7 7207foo
dc8465bf 7208_foo = foo
c0065db7 7209@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7210
7211The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7212
7213Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7214source code using the "weak" attribute:
7215
c0065db7
RM
7216@example
7217void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7218void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7219@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7220
7221See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7222symbols.
7223
7224@item renaming symbols
7225Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7226kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7227@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7228DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7229created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7230
c0065db7 7231@example
dc8465bf
NC
7232LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7233
7234EXPORTS
7235_foo = foo
c0065db7 7236@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7237
7238The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7239@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7240@end table
dc8465bf 7241
0a5d968e 7242Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7243unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7244If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7245@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7246that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7247@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7248renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7249to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7250the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7251In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7252which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7253
7254@cindex weak externals
7255@item weak externals
7256The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7257weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7258defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7259are three variants of weak externals:
7260@itemize
7261@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7262called lazy externals.
7263@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7264This form is not presently implemented.
7265@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7266implemented.
7267@end itemize
7268As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7269are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7270uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7271
7272@cindex aligned common symbols
7273@item aligned common symbols
7274As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7275desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7276the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7277carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7278by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7279tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7280but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7281warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7282@end table
7283
7284@ifclear GENERIC
7285@lowersections
7286@end ifclear
7287@end ifset
7288
e0001a05
NC
7289@ifset XTENSA
7290@ifclear GENERIC
7291@raisesections
7292@end ifclear
7293
7294@node Xtensa
7295@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7296
7297@cindex Xtensa processors
7298The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7299@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7300specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7301keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7302example, with the command:
7303
7304@smallexample
7305SECTIONS
7306@{
7307 .text : @{
7308 *(.literal .text)
7309 @}
7310@}
7311@end smallexample
7312
7313@noindent
7314@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7315and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7316literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7317interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7318group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7319files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7320and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7321
43cd72b9 7322@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7323@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7324Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7325provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7326is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7327literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7328will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7329location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7330the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7331unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7332@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7333range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7334
7335For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7336to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7337instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7338instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7339instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7340@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7341hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7342By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7343switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7344density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7345instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7346performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7347linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7348a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7349
7350The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7351control the linker:
7352
7353@cindex Xtensa options
7354@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7355@item --size-opt
7356When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7357more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7358no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7359alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7360preserve the correctness of the code.
7361@end table
e0001a05
NC
7362
7363@ifclear GENERIC
7364@lowersections
7365@end ifclear
7366@end ifset
7367
252b5132
RH
7368@ifclear SingleFormat
7369@node BFD
7370@chapter BFD
7371
7372@cindex back end
7373@cindex object file management
7374@cindex object formats available
7375@kindex objdump -i
7376The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7377These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7378object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7379format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7380it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7381associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7382object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7383(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7384list all the formats available for your configuration.
7385
7386@cindex BFD requirements
7387@cindex requirements for BFD
7388As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7389several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7390BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7391formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7392been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7393BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7394may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7395
7396One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7397mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7398useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7399conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7400
7401@menu
7402* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7403@end menu
7404
7405@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7406@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7407@cindex opening object files
7408@include bfdsumm.texi
7409@end ifclear
7410
7411@node Reporting Bugs
7412@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7413@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7414@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7415
ff5dcc92 7416Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7417
7418Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7419it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7420to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7421work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7422@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7423
7424In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7425information that enables us to fix the bug.
7426
7427@menu
7428* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7429* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7430@end menu
7431
7432@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7433@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7434@cindex bug criteria
7435
7436If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7437
7438@itemize @bullet
7439@cindex fatal signal
7440@cindex linker crash
7441@cindex crash of linker
7442@item
7443If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7444@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7445
7446@cindex error on valid input
7447@item
ff5dcc92 7448If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7449
7450@cindex invalid input
7451@item
ff5dcc92 7452If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7453may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7454object files are correct.
7455
7456@item
7457If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7458improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7459@end itemize
7460
7461@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7462@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7463@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7464@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7465
7466A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7467products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7468recommend you contact that organization first.
7469
7470You can find contact information for many support companies and
7471individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7472distribution.
7473
ad22bfe8 7474@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7475Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7476@value{BUGURL}.
7477@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7478
7479The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7480@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7481fact or leave it out, state it!
7482
7483Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7484problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7485assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7486matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7487the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7488location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7489were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7490into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7491specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7492and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7493
7494Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7495the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7496on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7497
7498Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7499bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7500respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7501You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7502
7503To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7504
7505@itemize @bullet
7506@item
ff5dcc92 7507The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7508the @samp{--version} argument.
7509
7510Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7511the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7512
7513@item
ff5dcc92 7514Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7515patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7516
7517@item
7518The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7519version number.
7520
7521@item
ff5dcc92 7522What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7523``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7524
7525@item
7526The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7527observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7528list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7529sufficient.
7530
7531If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7532and then we might not encounter the bug.
7533
7534@item
7535A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7536bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7537provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7538bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7539state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7540requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7541we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7542attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7543
7544If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7545@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7546object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7547@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7548how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7549
7550@item
7551A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7552incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7553
ff5dcc92 7554Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7555will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7556not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7557a chance to make a mistake.
7558
7559Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7560say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7561copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7562C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7563and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7564fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7565you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7566any conclusion from our observations.
7567
7568@item
ff5dcc92 7569If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7570diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7571@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7572If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7573context, not by line number.
7574
7575The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7576sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7577@end itemize
7578
7579Here are some things that are not necessary:
7580
7581@itemize @bullet
7582@item
7583A description of the envelope of the bug.
7584
7585Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7586which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7587changes will not affect it.
7588
7589This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7590will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7591with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7592We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7593
7594Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7595of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7596output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7597less time, and so on.
7598
7599However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7600report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7601
7602@item
7603A patch for the bug.
7604
7605A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7606the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7607a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7608to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7609
ff5dcc92 7610Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7611construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7612through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7613able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7614fixed.
7615
7616And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7617patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7618help us to understand.
7619
7620@item
7621A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7622
7623Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7624things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7625@end itemize
7626
7627@node MRI
7628@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7629@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7630To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7631linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7632alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7633described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7634simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7635@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7636linker commands; these commands are described here.
7637
7638In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7639file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7640features to make use of them.
7641
7642You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7643@samp{-c} command-line option.
7644
7645Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7646command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7647blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7648MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7649issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7650
7651Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7652
7653You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7654lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7655The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7656
7657@table @code
7658@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7659@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7660@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7661Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7662the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7663@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7664your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7665script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7666commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7667input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7668@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7669
7670@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7671@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7672Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7673in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7674
7675@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7676
7677@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7678@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7679Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7680@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7681
7682@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7683@item BASE @var{expression}
7684Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7685absolute addresses) in the output file.
7686
7687@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7688@item CHIP @var{expression}
7689@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7690This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7691
7692@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7693@item END
7694This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7695
7696@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7697@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7698Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7699language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7700
7701@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7702@item
252b5132
RH
7703S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7704
7705@item
7706IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7707
7708@item
7709COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7710@samp{COFF}
7711@end enumerate
7712
7713@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7714@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7715Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7716@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7717
7718The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7719same line, with no change in its effect.
7720
7721@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7722@item LOAD @var{filename}
7723@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7724Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7725same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7726command line.
7727
7728@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7729@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7730@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7731MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7732option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7733
7734@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7735@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7736@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7737Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7738order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7739script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7740sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7741file, in the order specified.
7742
7743@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7744@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7745@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7746@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7747Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7748@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7749
7750@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7751@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7752@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7753@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7754You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7755specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7756If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7757@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7758@end table
7759
793c5807
NC
7760@node GNU Free Documentation License
7761@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7762@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7763
370b66a1
CD
7764@node LD Index
7765@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7766
7767@printindex cp
7768
7769@tex
7770% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7771% meantime:
7772\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7773\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7774\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7775\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7776\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7777\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7778\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7779\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7780\page\colophon
7781% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7782@end tex
7783
252b5132 7784@bye
This page took 1.081852 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.